ld whitespace fixes
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset M68HC11
145 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset HPPA
148 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset MIPS
154 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset POWERPC64
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset S/390
163 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset SPU
166 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset TICOFF
169 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset WIN32
172 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173 @end ifset
174 @ifset XTENSA
175 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176 @end ifset
177 @end ifclear
178 @ifclear SingleFormat
179 * BFD:: BFD
180 @end ifclear
181 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
185 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
186 * LD Index:: LD Index
187 @end menu
188 @end ifnottex
189
190 @node Overview
191 @chapter Overview
192
193 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194 @cindex what is this?
195
196 @ifset man
197 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
198 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
199 @c man end
200
201 @c man begin SEEALSO
202 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204 @file{ld}.
205 @c man end
206 @end ifset
207
208 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
210 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
211 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
212 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
213
214 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
215 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
218 @ifset man
219 @c For the man only
220 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
221 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
223 @end ifset
224
225 @ifclear SingleFormat
226 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
228 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231 @end ifclear
232
233 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
236 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
237 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
239 @c man end
240
241 @node Invocation
242 @chapter Invocation
243
244 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
246 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
247 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248 you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
250 @c man end
251
252 @ifset UsesEnvVars
253 @menu
254 * Options:: Command Line Options
255 * Environment:: Environment Variables
256 @end menu
257
258 @node Options
259 @section Command Line Options
260 @end ifset
261
262 @cindex command line
263 @cindex options
264
265 @c man begin OPTIONS
266
267 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269 @cindex standard Unix system
270 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
271 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272 link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274 @smallexample
275 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276 @end smallexample
277
278 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
279 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
283 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
284 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
289 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291 noted in the descriptions below.
292
293 @cindex object files
294 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297 an option and its argument.
298
299 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303 message @samp{No input files}.
304
305 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
306 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
311 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
316
317 For options whose names are a single letter,
318 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320 option that requires them.
321
322 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
323 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
324 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
325 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
326 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
327 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329 output.
330
331 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336 accepted.
337
338 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
340 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341 compiler driver) like this:
342
343 @smallexample
344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
345 @end smallexample
346
347 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
348 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355 @smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357 @end smallexample
358
359 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360 linker:
361
362 @table @gcctabopt
363 @include at-file.texi
364
365 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
366 @item -a @var{keyword}
367 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
373 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
380 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
381 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
382 interface.
383
384 @ifset I960
385 @cindex architectures
386 @kindex -A @var{arch}
387 @item -A @var{architecture}
388 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
390 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
392 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
394 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
395 family}, for details.
396
397 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
398 other architecture families.
399 @end ifset
400
401 @ifclear SingleFormat
402 @cindex binary input format
403 @kindex -b @var{format}
404 @kindex --format=@var{format}
405 @cindex input format
406 @cindex input format
407 @item -b @var{input-format}
408 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
409 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
411 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
412 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
413 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
414 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
415 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419 @xref{BFD}.
420
421 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423 linking object files of different formats), by including
424 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
425 particular format.
426
427 The default format is taken from the environment variable
428 @code{GNUTARGET}.
429 @ifset UsesEnvVars
430 @xref{Environment}.
431 @end ifset
432 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
433 @code{TARGET};
434 @ifclear man
435 see @ref{Format Commands}.
436 @end ifclear
437 @end ifclear
438
439 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441 @cindex compatibility, MRI
442 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
444 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
445 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
446 @ifclear man
447 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448 @end ifclear
449 @ifset man
450 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451 @end ifset
452 Introduce MRI script files with
453 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
454 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
456 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458 @cindex common allocation
459 @kindex -d
460 @kindex -dc
461 @kindex -dp
462 @item -d
463 @itemx -dc
464 @itemx -dp
465 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
471 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
480 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
481
482 @cindex entry point, from command line
483 @kindex -e @var{entry}
484 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
485 @item -e @var{entry}
486 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
495 @kindex --exclude-libs
496 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
498 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
499 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504 be treated as hidden.
505
506 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517 regardless of this option.
518
519 @cindex dynamic symbol table
520 @kindex -E
521 @kindex --export-dynamic
522 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
523 @item -E
524 @itemx --export-dynamic
525 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
526 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
535
536 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539 linking the program itself.
540
541 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
542 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
543 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
544
545 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
549 @ifclear SingleFormat
550 @cindex big-endian objects
551 @cindex endianness
552 @kindex -EB
553 @item -EB
554 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556 @cindex little-endian objects
557 @kindex -EL
558 @item -EL
559 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
560 @end ifclear
561
562 @kindex -f @var{name}
563 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564 @item -f @var{name}
565 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
566 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579 machine specific performance.
580
581 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
584 @kindex -F @var{name}
585 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
586 @item -F @var{name}
587 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599 @var{name}.
600
601 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
602 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
603 object files.
604 @ifclear SingleFormat
605 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
606 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
607 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
608 environment variable.
609 @end ifclear
610 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611 creating an ELF shared object.
612
613 @cindex finalization function
614 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
615 @item -fini=@var{name}
616 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619 the function to call.
620
621 @kindex -g
622 @item -g
623 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
625 @kindex -G @var{value}
626 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
627 @cindex object size
628 @item -G @var{value}
629 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
632 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
633 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635 @cindex runtime library name
636 @kindex -h @var{name}
637 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
638 @item -h @var{name}
639 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
640 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646 @kindex -i
647 @cindex incremental link
648 @item -i
649 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
651 @cindex initialization function
652 @kindex -init=@var{name}
653 @item -init=@var{name}
654 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657 function to call.
658
659 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
660 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
661 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
662 @item -l @var{namespec}
663 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
667 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
668 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
669
670 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
671 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677 @var{filename}.
678
679 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
686 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
687 archives multiple times.
688
689 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691 @ifset GENERIC
692 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
693 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
694 behaviour of the AIX linker.
695 @end ifset
696
697 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
698 @kindex -L @var{dir}
699 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
700 @item -L @var{searchdir}
701 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
702 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
704 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
707 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
708 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710 option is specified.
711
712 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
715
716 @ifset UsesEnvVars
717 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
718 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
719 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720 @end ifset
721
722 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726 @cindex emulation
727 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
728 @item -m @var{emulation}
729 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736 configured.
737
738 @cindex link map
739 @kindex -M
740 @kindex --print-map
741 @item -M
742 @itemx --print-map
743 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744 information about the link, including the following:
745
746 @itemize @bullet
747 @item
748 Where object files are mapped into memory.
749 @item
750 How common symbols are allocated.
751 @item
752 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
754 @item
755 The values assigned to symbols.
756
757 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763 linker script containing:
764
765 @smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769 @end smallexample
770
771 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772 option is used:
773
774 @smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778 @end smallexample
779
780 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781 scripts.
782 @end itemize
783
784 @kindex -n
785 @cindex read-only text
786 @cindex NMAGIC
787 @kindex --nmagic
788 @item -n
789 @itemx --nmagic
790 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
793
794 @kindex -N
795 @kindex --omagic
796 @cindex read/write from cmd line
797 @cindex OMAGIC
798 @item -N
799 @itemx --omagic
800 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
801 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805 specification published by Microsoft.
806
807 @kindex --no-omagic
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item --no-omagic
810 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
814
815 @kindex -o @var{output}
816 @kindex --output=@var{output}
817 @cindex naming the output file
818 @item -o @var{output}
819 @itemx --output=@var{output}
820 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
821 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824 @kindex -O @var{level}
825 @cindex generating optimized output
826 @item -O @var{level}
827 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
828 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
829 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
834
835 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
836 @item -plugin @var{name}
837 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841 wish.
842
843 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849 just copy in the newest one.
850
851 @kindex --push-state
852 @cindex push state governing input file handling
853 @item --push-state
854 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868 something as follows:
869
870 @smallexample
871 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872 @end smallexample
873
874 @kindex --pop-state
875 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
876 @item --pop-state
877 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878 flags governing input file handling.
879
880 @kindex -q
881 @kindex --emit-relocs
882 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
883 @item -q
884 @itemx --emit-relocs
885 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
886 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888 in larger executables.
889
890 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
892 @kindex --force-dynamic
893 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894 @item --force-dynamic
895 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896 to VxWorks targets.
897
898 @cindex partial link
899 @cindex relocatable output
900 @kindex -r
901 @kindex --relocatable
902 @item -r
903 @itemx --relocatable
904 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
905 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
906 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908 @code{OMAGIC}.
909 @c ; see @option{-N}.
910 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
914 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918 with input files in other formats at all.
919
920 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922 @kindex -R @var{file}
923 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924 @cindex symbol-only input
925 @item -R @var{filename}
926 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930 programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
932 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
933 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
934 the @option{-rpath} option.
935
936 @kindex -s
937 @kindex --strip-all
938 @cindex strip all symbols
939 @item -s
940 @itemx --strip-all
941 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943 @kindex -S
944 @kindex --strip-debug
945 @cindex strip debugger symbols
946 @item -S
947 @itemx --strip-debug
948 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
950 @kindex --strip-discarded
951 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
952 @item --strip-discarded
953 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
954 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955 Enabled by default.
956
957 @kindex -t
958 @kindex --trace
959 @cindex input files, displaying
960 @item -t
961 @itemx --trace
962 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
963
964 @kindex -T @var{script}
965 @kindex --script=@var{script}
966 @cindex script files
967 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
968 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
970 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
971 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
972 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975 options accumulate.
976
977 @kindex -dT @var{script}
978 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979 @cindex script files
980 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991 @samp{gcc}).
992
993 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex undefined symbol
996 @item -u @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
1004 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007 instead.
1008
1009 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex symbols, require defined
1011 @cindex defined symbol
1012 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
1020 @kindex -Ur
1021 @cindex constructors
1022 @item -Ur
1023 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1025 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1026 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030 @samp{-r} for the others.
1031
1032 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033 @cindex orphan sections
1034 @cindex sections, orphan
1035 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041 @table @code
1042 @item place
1043 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1045 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1046
1047 @item discard
1048 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051 @item warn
1052 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053 issue a warning.
1054
1055 @item error
1056 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057 @end table
1058
1059 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
1061 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069 in a linker script.
1070
1071 @kindex -v
1072 @kindex -V
1073 @kindex --version
1074 @cindex version
1075 @item -v
1076 @itemx --version
1077 @itemx -V
1078 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1079 lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081 @kindex -x
1082 @kindex --discard-all
1083 @cindex deleting local symbols
1084 @item -x
1085 @itemx --discard-all
1086 Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088 @kindex -X
1089 @kindex --discard-locals
1090 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1091 @item -X
1092 @itemx --discard-locals
1093 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1096
1097 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099 @cindex symbol tracing
1100 @item -y @var{symbol}
1101 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104 to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1110 @item -Y @var{path}
1111 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112 for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115 @item -z @var{keyword}
1116 The recognized keywords are:
1117 @table @samp
1118
1119 @item combreloc
1120 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121 lookup caching possible.
1122
1123 @item common
1124 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1125 link.
1126
1127 @item defs
1128 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1129 shared libraries are still allowed.
1130
1131 @item execstack
1132 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1133
1134 @item global
1135 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1138
1139 @item globalaudit
1140 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1141 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1142 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1143 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1144 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1145 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1146
1147 @item initfirst
1148 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1149 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1150 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1151 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1152 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1153 objects.
1154
1155 @item interpose
1156 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1157 but the primary executable.
1158
1159 @item lazy
1160 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1161 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1162 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1163 Lazy binding is the default.
1164
1165 @item loadfltr
1166 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1167 runtime.
1168
1169 @item muldefs
1170 Allows multiple definitions.
1171
1172 @item nocombreloc
1173 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1174
1175 @item nocommon
1176 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1177 link.
1178
1179 @item nocopyreloc
1180 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1181 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1182
1183 @item nodefaultlib
1184 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1185 ignore any default library search paths.
1186
1187 @item nodelete
1188 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1189
1190 @item nodlopen
1191 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1192
1193 @item nodump
1194 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1195
1196 @item noexecstack
1197 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1198
1199 @item text
1200 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1201
1202 @item notext
1203 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1204
1205 @item textoff
1206 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1207
1208 @item norelro
1209 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1210
1211 @item now
1212 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1213 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1214 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1215 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1216 first called.
1217
1218 @item origin
1219 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1220
1221 @item relro
1222 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1223 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1224 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1225 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1226
1227 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1228 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1229
1230 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1231 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1232
1233 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1234 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1235 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1236 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1237
1238 @item bndplt
1239 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1240
1241 @item noextern-protected-data
1242 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1243 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1244 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1245 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1246 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1247 i386 and x86-64.
1248
1249 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1250 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1251 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1252 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1253 option.
1254
1255 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1256 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1257 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1258 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1259 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1260 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1261
1262 @item noreloc-overflow
1263 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1264 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1265 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1266
1267 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1268 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1269 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1270 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1271 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1272 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1273 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1274 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1275 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1276 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1277 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1278
1279 @item ibtplt
1280 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1281 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1282
1283 @item IBT
1284 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1285 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1286 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1287
1288 @item shstk
1289 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1290 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1291 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1292
1293 @end table
1294
1295 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1296
1297 @kindex -(
1298 @cindex groups of archives
1299 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1300 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1301 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1302 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1303
1304 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1305 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1306 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1307 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1308 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1309 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1310 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1311 resolved.
1312
1313 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1314 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1315 more archives.
1316
1317 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1318 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1319 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1320 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1321 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1322 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1323 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1324 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1325 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1326 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1327 restore the old behaviour.
1328
1329 @kindex --as-needed
1330 @kindex --no-as-needed
1331 @item --as-needed
1332 @itemx --no-as-needed
1333 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1334 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1335 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1336 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1337 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1338 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1339 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1340 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1341 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1342 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1343 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1344 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1345 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1346
1347 @kindex --add-needed
1348 @kindex --no-add-needed
1349 @item --add-needed
1350 @itemx --no-add-needed
1351 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1352 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1353 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1354 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1355
1356 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1357 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1358 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1359
1360 @kindex -Bdynamic
1361 @kindex -dy
1362 @kindex -call_shared
1363 @item -Bdynamic
1364 @itemx -dy
1365 @itemx -call_shared
1366 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1367 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1368 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1369 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1370 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1371 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1372
1373 @kindex -Bgroup
1374 @item -Bgroup
1375 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1376 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1377 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1378 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1379 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1380
1381 @kindex -Bstatic
1382 @kindex -dn
1383 @kindex -non_shared
1384 @kindex -static
1385 @item -Bstatic
1386 @itemx -dn
1387 @itemx -non_shared
1388 @itemx -static
1389 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1390 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1391 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1392 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1393 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1394 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1395 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1396 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1397 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1398 libraries.
1399
1400 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1401 @item -Bsymbolic
1402 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1403 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1404 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1405 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1406 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1407 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1408 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1409 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1410
1411 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1412 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1413 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1414 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1415 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1416 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1417 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1418 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1419 libraries and position independent executables.
1420
1421 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1422 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1423 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1424 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1425 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1426 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1427 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1428 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1429 which support shared libraries.
1430
1431 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1432 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1433
1434 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1435 @item --dynamic-list-data
1436 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1437
1438 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1439 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1440 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1441 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1442
1443 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1444 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1445 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1446
1447 @kindex --check-sections
1448 @kindex --no-check-sections
1449 @item --check-sections
1450 @itemx --no-check-sections
1451 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1452 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1453 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1454 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1455 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1456 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1457 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1458 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1459 option.
1460
1461 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1462 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1463 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1464 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1465 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1466 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1467 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1468 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1469 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1470 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1471 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1472 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1473
1474 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1475 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1476 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1477 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1478 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1479 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1480 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1481 symbols.
1482
1483 @cindex cross reference table
1484 @kindex --cref
1485 @item --cref
1486 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1487 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1488 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1489
1490 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1491 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1492 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1493 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1494 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1495 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1496 symbol are listed.
1497
1498 @cindex common allocation
1499 @kindex --no-define-common
1500 @item --no-define-common
1501 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1502 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1503 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1504
1505 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1506 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1507 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1508 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1509 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1510 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1511 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1512 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1513 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1514 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1515
1516 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1517 @cindex section groups
1518 @cindex COMDAT
1519 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1520 @item --force-group-allocation
1521 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1522 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1523 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1524 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1525 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1526 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1527
1528 @cindex symbols, from command line
1529 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1530 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1531 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1532 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1533 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1534 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1535 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1536 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1537 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1538 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1539 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1540 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1541
1542 @cindex demangling, from command line
1543 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1544 @kindex --no-demangle
1545 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1546 @itemx --no-demangle
1547 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1548 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1549 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1550 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1551 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1552 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1553 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1554 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1555 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1556
1557 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1558 @kindex -I@var{file}
1559 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1560 @item -I@var{file}
1561 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1562 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1563 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1564 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1565 doing.
1566
1567 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1568 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1569 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1570 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1571 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1572 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1573
1574 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1575 @item --embedded-relocs
1576 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1577 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1578 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1579 targets.
1580
1581 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1582 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1583 @item --fatal-warnings
1584 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1585 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1586 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1587
1588 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1589 @item --force-exe-suffix
1590 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1591
1592 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1593 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1594 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1595 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1596 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1597 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1598
1599 @kindex --gc-sections
1600 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1601 @cindex garbage collection
1602 @item --gc-sections
1603 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1604 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1605 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1606 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1607 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1608 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1609 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1610
1611 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1612 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1613 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1614 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1615 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1616 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1617 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1618 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1619 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1620
1621 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1622 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1623 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1624 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1625
1626 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1627 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1628 @cindex garbage collection
1629 @item --print-gc-sections
1630 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1631 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1632 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1633 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1634 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1635 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1636 line.
1637
1638 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1639 @cindex garbage collection
1640 @item --gc-keep-exported
1641 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1642 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1643 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1644 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1645 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1646 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1647 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1648 ELF format targets.
1649
1650 @kindex --print-output-format
1651 @cindex output format
1652 @item --print-output-format
1653 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1654 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1655 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1656
1657 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1658 @cindex memory usage
1659 @item --print-memory-usage
1660 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1661 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1662 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1663 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1664 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1665
1666 @smallexample
1667 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1668 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1669 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1670 @end smallexample
1671
1672 @cindex help
1673 @cindex usage
1674 @kindex --help
1675 @item --help
1676 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1677
1678 @kindex --target-help
1679 @item --target-help
1680 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1681
1682 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1683 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1684 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1685 @option{-M} option, above.
1686
1687 @cindex memory usage
1688 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1689 @item --no-keep-memory
1690 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1691 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1692 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1693 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1694 while linking a large executable.
1695
1696 @kindex --no-undefined
1697 @kindex -z defs
1698 @item --no-undefined
1699 @itemx -z defs
1700 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1701 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1702 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1703 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1704 libraries being linked in.
1705
1706 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1707 @kindex -z muldefs
1708 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1709 @itemx -z muldefs
1710 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1711 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1712 first definition will be used.
1713
1714 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1715 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1716 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1717 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1718 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1719 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1720 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1721 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1722 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1723
1724 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1725 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1726 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1727 a shared library.
1728
1729 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1730 libraries specified at link time are that:
1731
1732 @itemize @bullet
1733 @item
1734 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1735 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1736 resolvable at load time.
1737 @item
1738 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1739 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1740
1741 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1742 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1743 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1744 appropriate memset function.
1745 @end itemize
1746
1747 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1748 @item --no-undefined-version
1749 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1750 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1751 will be issued instead.
1752
1753 @kindex --default-symver
1754 @item --default-symver
1755 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1756 exported symbols.
1757
1758 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1759 @item --default-imported-symver
1760 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1761 imported symbols.
1762
1763 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1764 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1765 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1766 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1767 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1768 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1769 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1770 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1771 inappropriate.
1772
1773 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1774 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1775 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1776 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1777
1778 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1779 @item --no-whole-archive
1780 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1781 archive files.
1782
1783 @cindex output file after errors
1784 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1785 @item --noinhibit-exec
1786 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1787 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1788 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1789 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1790
1791 @kindex -nostdlib
1792 @item -nostdlib
1793 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1794 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1795 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1796
1797 @ifclear SingleFormat
1798 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1799 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1800 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1801 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1802 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1803 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1804 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1805 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1806 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1807 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1808 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1809 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1810 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1811 @end ifclear
1812
1813 @kindex --out-implib
1814 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1815 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1816 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1817 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1818 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1819 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1820 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1821 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1822
1823 @kindex -pie
1824 @kindex --pic-executable
1825 @item -pie
1826 @itemx --pic-executable
1827 @cindex position independent executables
1828 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1829 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1830 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1831 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1832 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1833 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1834
1835 @kindex -qmagic
1836 @item -qmagic
1837 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1838
1839 @kindex -Qy
1840 @item -Qy
1841 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1842
1843 @kindex --relax
1844 @cindex synthesizing linker
1845 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1846 @cindex --no-relax
1847 @item --relax
1848 @itemx --no-relax
1849 An option with machine dependent effects.
1850 @ifset GENERIC
1851 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1852 @end ifset
1853 @ifset H8300
1854 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1855 @end ifset
1856 @ifset I960
1857 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1858 @end ifset
1859 @ifset XTENSA
1860 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1861 @end ifset
1862 @ifset M68HC11
1863 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1864 @end ifset
1865 @ifset NIOSII
1866 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1867 @end ifset
1868 @ifset POWERPC
1869 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1870 @end ifset
1871
1872 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1873 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1874 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1875 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1876 instructions, and combining constant values.
1877
1878 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1879 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1880 @ifset GENERIC
1881 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1882 family of processors.
1883 @end ifset
1884
1885 @ifset GENERIC
1886 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1887 but ignored.
1888 @end ifset
1889
1890 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1891 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1892
1893 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1894 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1895 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1896 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1897 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1898 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1899 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1900 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1901 @ifset GENERIC
1902 (such as VxWorks)
1903 @end ifset
1904 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1905 run-time memory.
1906
1907 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1908 or symbols needed for relocations.
1909
1910 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1911 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1912
1913 @ifset GENERIC
1914 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1915 @cindex runtime library search path
1916 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1917 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1918 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1919 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1920 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1921 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1922 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1923 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1924 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1925 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1926
1927 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1928 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1929 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1930 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1931 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1932 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1933 file systems.
1934
1935 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1936 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1937 the @option{-rpath} option.
1938 @end ifset
1939
1940 @ifset GENERIC
1941 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1942 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1943 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1944 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1945 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1946 of the input files.
1947
1948 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1949 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1950 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1951 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1952 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1953 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1954 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1955 appearing multiple times.
1956
1957 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1958 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1959 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1960 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1961 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1962
1963 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1964 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1965 supported.
1966
1967 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1968 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1969 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1970 runtime linker would do.
1971
1972 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1973 libraries:
1974 @enumerate
1975 @item
1976 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1977 @item
1978 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1979 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1980 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1981 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1982 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1983 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1984 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1985 @item
1986 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1987 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1988 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1989 @item
1990 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1991 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1992 @item
1993 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1994 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1995 @item
1996 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1997 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1998 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1999 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2000 @item
2001 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2002 @item
2003 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2004 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2005 @end enumerate
2006
2007 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2008 warning and continue with the link.
2009 @end ifset
2010
2011 @kindex -shared
2012 @kindex -Bshareable
2013 @item -shared
2014 @itemx -Bshareable
2015 @cindex shared libraries
2016 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2017 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2018 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2019 undefined symbols in the link.
2020
2021 @kindex --sort-common
2022 @item --sort-common
2023 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2024 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2025 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2026 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2027 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2028 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2029 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2030 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2031
2032 @kindex --sort-section=name
2033 @item --sort-section=name
2034 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2035 patterns in the linker script.
2036
2037 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2038 @item --sort-section=alignment
2039 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2040 patterns in the linker script.
2041
2042 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2043 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2044 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2045 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2046 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2047
2048 @kindex --split-by-file
2049 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2050 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2051 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2052 size of 1 if not given.
2053
2054 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2055 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2056 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2057 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2058 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2059 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2060 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2061 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2062 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2063 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2064 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2065 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2066
2067 @kindex --stats
2068 @item --stats
2069 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2070 as execution time and memory usage.
2071
2072 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2073 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2074 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2075 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2076 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2077
2078 @kindex --task-link
2079 @item --task-link
2080 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2081 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2082
2083 @kindex --traditional-format
2084 @cindex traditional format
2085 @item --traditional-format
2086 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2087 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2088 use the traditional format instead.
2089
2090 @cindex dbx
2091 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2092 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2093 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2094 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2095 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2096 combine duplicate entries.
2097
2098 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2099 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2100 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2101 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2102 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2103 line.
2104 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2105 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2106 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2107 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2108 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2109
2110 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2111 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2112 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2113 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2114 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2115 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2116 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2117 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2118 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2119
2120 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2121 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2122 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2123 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2124 byte of the text segment.
2125
2126 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2127 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2128 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2129 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2130 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2131 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2132
2133 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2134 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2135 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2136 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2137 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2138
2139 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2140 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2141 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2142 values for @samp{method}:
2143
2144 @table @samp
2145 @item ignore-all
2146 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2147
2148 @item report-all
2149 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2150
2151 @item ignore-in-object-files
2152 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2153 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2154
2155 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2156 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2157 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2158 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2159 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2160 command line.
2161 @end table
2162
2163 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2164 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2165
2166 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2167 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2168 can change this to a warning.
2169
2170 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2171 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2172 @item --dll-verbose
2173 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2174 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2175 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2176 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2177 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2178
2179 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2180 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2181 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2182 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2183 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2184 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2185 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2186 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2187 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2188 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2189 @xref{WIN32}.
2190
2191 @kindex --warn-common
2192 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2193 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2194 @item --warn-common
2195 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2196 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2197 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2198 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2199 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2200 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2201
2202 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2203
2204 @table @samp
2205 @item int i = 1;
2206 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2207 file.
2208
2209 @item extern int i;
2210 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2211 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2212 variable somewhere.
2213
2214 @item int i;
2215 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2216 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2217 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2218 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2219 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2220 a definition of the same variable.
2221 @end table
2222
2223 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2224 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2225 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2226 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2227 a common symbol.
2228
2229 @enumerate
2230 @item
2231 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2232 definition for the symbol.
2233 @smallexample
2234 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2235 overridden by definition
2236 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2237 @end smallexample
2238
2239 @item
2240 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2241 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2242 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2243 @smallexample
2244 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2245 overriding common
2246 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2247 @end smallexample
2248
2249 @item
2250 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2251 @smallexample
2252 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2253 of `@var{symbol}'
2254 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2255 @end smallexample
2256
2257 @item
2258 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2259 @smallexample
2260 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2261 overridden by larger common
2262 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2263 @end smallexample
2264
2265 @item
2266 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2267 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2268 encountered in a different order.
2269 @smallexample
2270 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2271 overriding smaller common
2272 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2273 @end smallexample
2274 @end enumerate
2275
2276 @kindex --warn-constructors
2277 @item --warn-constructors
2278 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2279 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2280 detect the use of global constructors.
2281
2282 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2283 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2284 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2285 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2286 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2287 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2288 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2289 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2290 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2291 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2292 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2293 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2294 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2295
2296 @kindex --warn-once
2297 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2298 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2299 @item --warn-once
2300 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2301 which refers to it.
2302
2303 @kindex --warn-section-align
2304 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2305 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2306 @item --warn-section-align
2307 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2308 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2309 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2310 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2311 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2312
2313 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2314 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2315 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2316
2317 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2318 @item --warn-alternate-em
2319 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2320
2321 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2322 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2323 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2324 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2325 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2326
2327 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2328 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2329 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2330 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2331
2332 @kindex --whole-archive
2333 @cindex including an entire archive
2334 @item --whole-archive
2335 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2336 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2337 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2338 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2339 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2340 library. This option may be used more than once.
2341
2342 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2343 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2344 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2345 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2346 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2347
2348 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2349 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2350 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2351 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2352 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2353 @var{symbol}.
2354
2355 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2356 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2357 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2358 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2359
2360 Here is a trivial example:
2361
2362 @smallexample
2363 void *
2364 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2365 @{
2366 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2367 return __real_malloc (c);
2368 @}
2369 @end smallexample
2370
2371 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2372 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2373 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2374 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2375
2376 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2377 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2378 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2379 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2380 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2381
2382 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2383 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2384 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2385 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2386 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2387 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2388 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2389
2390 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2391 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2392 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2393 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2394 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2395
2396 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2397 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2398 @item --enable-new-dtags
2399 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2400 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2401 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2402 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2403 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2404 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2405 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2406 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2407
2408 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2409 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2410 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2411 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2412 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2413 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2414 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2415
2416 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2417 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2418 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2419 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2420 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2421 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2422 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2423
2424 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2425 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2426 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2427 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2428 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2429 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2430 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2431 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2432 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2433 compressed using zlib.
2434
2435 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2436 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2437 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2438 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2439 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2440 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2441
2442 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2443 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2444
2445 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2446 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2447 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2448 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2449
2450 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2451 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2452 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2453 @option{--help} option.
2454
2455 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2456 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2457 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2458 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2459 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2460 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2461
2462 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2463 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2464 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2465 has been used.
2466
2467 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2468 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2469
2470 @kindex --build-id
2471 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2472 @item --build-id
2473 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2474 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2475 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2476 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2477 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2478 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2479 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2480 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2481 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2482 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2483 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2484
2485 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2486 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2487 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2488 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2489 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2490 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2491
2492 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2493 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2494 @end table
2495
2496 @c man end
2497
2498 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2499
2500 @c man begin OPTIONS
2501
2502 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2503 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2504 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2505 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2506 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2507 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2508 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2509 object file).
2510
2511 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2512 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2513 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2514 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2515
2516 @table @gcctabopt
2517
2518 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2519 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2520 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2521 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2522 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2523
2524 @kindex --base-file
2525 @item --base-file @var{file}
2526 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2527 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2528 @file{dlltool}.
2529 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2530
2531 @kindex --dll
2532 @item --dll
2533 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2534 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2535 file.
2536 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2537
2538 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2539 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2540 @item --enable-long-section-names
2541 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2542 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2543 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2544 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2545 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2546 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2547 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2548 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2549 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2550 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2551 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2552 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2553 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2554 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2555 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2556 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2557 image and not stripping symbols.
2558 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2559
2560 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2561 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2562 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2563 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2564 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2565 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2566 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2567 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2568 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2569 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2570 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2571 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2572 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2573 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2574 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2575 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2576 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2577 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2578
2579 @kindex --leading-underscore
2580 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2581 @item --leading-underscore
2582 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2583 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2584 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2585 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2586
2587 @cindex DLLs, creating
2588 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2589 @item --export-all-symbols
2590 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2591 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2592 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2593 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2594 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2595 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2596 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2597 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2598 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2599 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2600 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2601 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2602 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2603 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2604 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2605 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2606 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2607 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2608 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2609 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2610 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2611 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2612 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
2614 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2615 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2616 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2617 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2618 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2619
2620 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2621 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2622 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2623 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2624
2625 @kindex --file-alignment
2626 @item --file-alignment
2627 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2628 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2629 512.
2630 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631
2632 @cindex heap size
2633 @kindex --heap
2634 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2635 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2636 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2637 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2638 committed.
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2640
2641 @cindex image base
2642 @kindex --image-base
2643 @item --image-base @var{value}
2644 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2645 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2646 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2647 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2648 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2649 for dlls.
2650 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2651
2652 @kindex --kill-at
2653 @item --kill-at
2654 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2655 symbols before they are exported.
2656 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2657
2658 @kindex --large-address-aware
2659 @item --large-address-aware
2660 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2661 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2662 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2663 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2664 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2665 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2666
2667 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2668 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2669 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2670 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2671 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2672 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2673 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --major-image-version
2676 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2677 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --major-os-version
2681 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2682 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2686 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2687 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2688 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2689
2690 @kindex --minor-image-version
2691 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2692 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2693 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2694
2695 @kindex --minor-os-version
2696 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2697 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2698 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2699
2700 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2701 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2702 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2704
2705 @cindex DEF files, creating
2706 @cindex DLLs, creating
2707 @kindex --output-def
2708 @item --output-def @var{file}
2709 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2710 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2711 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2712 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2713 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2715
2716 @cindex DLLs, creating
2717 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2718 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2719 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2720 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2721 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2722 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2723 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2724 execution are avoided.
2725 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2728 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2729 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2730 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2731 default.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2735 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2736 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2737 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2738 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2739 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2740 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2741 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2742 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2746 @item --enable-auto-import
2747 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2748 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2749 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2750 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2751 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2752 specification published by Microsoft.
2753
2754 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2755 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2756 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2757 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2758 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2759
2760 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2761 see this message:
2762
2763 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2764 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2765
2766 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2767 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2768 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2769 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2770 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2771 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2772 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2773 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2774 the warning, and exit.
2775
2776 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2777 data type of the exported variable:
2778
2779 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2780 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2781 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2782
2783 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2784 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2785 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2786 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2787
2788 @example
2789 extern type extern_array[];
2790 extern_array[1] -->
2791 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2792 @end example
2793
2794 or
2795
2796 @example
2797 extern type extern_array[];
2798 extern_array[1] -->
2799 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2800 @end example
2801
2802 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2803 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2804
2805 @example
2806 extern struct s extern_struct;
2807 extern_struct.field -->
2808 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2809 @end example
2810
2811 or
2812
2813 @example
2814 extern long long extern_ll;
2815 extern_ll -->
2816 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2817 @end example
2818
2819 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2820 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2821 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2822 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2823 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2824 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2825 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2826 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2827
2828 Original:
2829 @example
2830 --foo.h
2831 extern int arr[];
2832 --foo.c
2833 #include "foo.h"
2834 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2835 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2836 @}
2837 @end example
2838
2839 Solution 1:
2840 @example
2841 --foo.h
2842 extern int arr[];
2843 --foo.c
2844 #include "foo.h"
2845 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2846 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2847 volatile int *parr = arr;
2848 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2849 @}
2850 @end example
2851
2852 Solution 2:
2853 @example
2854 --foo.h
2855 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2856 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2857 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2858 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2859 #else
2860 #define FOO_IMPORT
2861 #endif
2862 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2863 --foo.c
2864 #include "foo.h"
2865 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2866 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2867 @}
2868 @end example
2869
2870 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2871 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2872 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2873 functions).
2874 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2875
2876 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2877 @item --disable-auto-import
2878 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2879 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2880 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2881
2882 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2883 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2884 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2885 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2886 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2887 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2888 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2889
2890 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2891 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2892 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2893 DLLs.
2894 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2895
2896 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2897 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2898 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2899 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2900
2901 @kindex --section-alignment
2902 @item --section-alignment
2903 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2904 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2905 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2906
2907 @cindex stack size
2908 @kindex --stack
2909 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2910 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2911 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2912 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2913 committed.
2914 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2915
2916 @kindex --subsystem
2917 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2918 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2919 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2920 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2921 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2922 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2923 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2924 @var{which}.
2925 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2926
2927 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2928 of the PE file header:
2929 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2930
2931 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2932 @item --high-entropy-va
2933 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2934 (ASLR).
2935
2936 @kindex --dynamicbase
2937 @item --dynamicbase
2938 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2939 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2940 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2941
2942 @kindex --forceinteg
2943 @item --forceinteg
2944 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2945
2946 @kindex --nxcompat
2947 @item --nxcompat
2948 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2949 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2950
2951 @kindex --no-isolation
2952 @item --no-isolation
2953 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2954
2955 @kindex --no-seh
2956 @item --no-seh
2957 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2958 this image.
2959
2960 @kindex --no-bind
2961 @item --no-bind
2962 Do not bind this image.
2963
2964 @kindex --wdmdriver
2965 @item --wdmdriver
2966 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2967
2968 @kindex --tsaware
2969 @item --tsaware
2970 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2971
2972 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2973 @item --insert-timestamp
2974 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2975 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2976 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2977 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2978 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2979 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2980 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2981 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2982 identically.
2983 @end table
2984
2985 @c man end
2986
2987 @ifset C6X
2988 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2989
2990 @c man begin OPTIONS
2991
2992 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2993 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2994 all executables use an index of 0.
2995
2996 @table @gcctabopt
2997
2998 @kindex --dsbt-size
2999 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3000 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3001 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3002 entries.
3003
3004 @kindex --dsbt-index
3005 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3006 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3007 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3008 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3009 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3010
3011 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3012 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3013 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3014
3015 @end table
3016
3017 @c man end
3018 @end ifset
3019
3020 @ifset M68HC11
3021 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3022
3023 @c man begin OPTIONS
3024
3025 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3026 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3027
3028 @table @gcctabopt
3029
3030 @kindex --no-trampoline
3031 @item --no-trampoline
3032 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3033 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3034 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3035
3036 @kindex --bank-window
3037 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3038 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3039 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3040 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3041 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3042
3043 @end table
3044
3045 @c man end
3046 @end ifset
3047
3048 @ifset M68K
3049 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3050
3051 @c man begin OPTIONS
3052
3053 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3054 when linking for 68K targets.
3055
3056 @table @gcctabopt
3057
3058 @kindex --got
3059 @item --got=@var{type}
3060 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3061 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3062 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3063 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3064
3065 @end table
3066
3067 @c man end
3068 @end ifset
3069
3070 @ifset MIPS
3071 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3072
3073 @c man begin OPTIONS
3074
3075 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3076 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3077 linking for MIPS targets.
3078
3079 @table @gcctabopt
3080
3081 @kindex --insn32
3082 @item --insn32
3083 @kindex --no-insn32
3084 @itemx --no-insn32
3085 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3086 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3087 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3088 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3089 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3090 possible.
3091
3092 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3093 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3094 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3095 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3096 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3097 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3098 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3099 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3100 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3101 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3102 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3103 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3104 an error.
3105
3106 @end table
3107
3108 @c man end
3109 @end ifset
3110
3111 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3112 @node Environment
3113 @section Environment Variables
3114
3115 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3116
3117 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3118 @ifclear SingleFormat
3119 @code{GNUTARGET},
3120 @end ifclear
3121 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3122
3123 @ifclear SingleFormat
3124 @kindex GNUTARGET
3125 @cindex default input format
3126 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3127 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3128 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3129 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3130 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3131 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3132 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3133 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3134 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3135 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3136 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3137 @end ifclear
3138
3139 @kindex LDEMULATION
3140 @cindex default emulation
3141 @cindex emulation, default
3142 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3143 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3144 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3145 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3146 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3147 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3148 linker was configured.
3149
3150 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3151 @cindex demangling, default
3152 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3153 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3154 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3155 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3156 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3157 options.
3158
3159 @c man end
3160 @end ifset
3161
3162 @node Scripts
3163 @chapter Linker Scripts
3164
3165 @cindex scripts
3166 @cindex linker scripts
3167 @cindex command files
3168 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3169 written in the linker command language.
3170
3171 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3172 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3173 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3174 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3175 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3176 described below.
3177
3178 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3179 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3180 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3181 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3182 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3183
3184 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3185 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3186 default linker script.
3187
3188 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3189 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3190 Linker Scripts}.
3191
3192 @menu
3193 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3194 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3195 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3196 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3197 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3198 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3199 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3200 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3201 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3202 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3203 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3204 @end menu
3205
3206 @node Basic Script Concepts
3207 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3208 @cindex linker script concepts
3209 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3210 describe the linker script language.
3211
3212 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3213 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3214 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3215 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3216 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3217 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3218 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3219 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3220
3221 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3222 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3223 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3224 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3225 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3226 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3227 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3228 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3229 of debugging information.
3230
3231 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3232 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3233 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3234 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3235 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3236 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3237 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3238 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3239 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3240 RAM address would be the VMA.
3241
3242 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3243 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3244
3245 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3246 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3247 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3248 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3249 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3250 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3251 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3252
3253 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3254 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3255 option.
3256
3257 @node Script Format
3258 @section Linker Script Format
3259 @cindex linker script format
3260 Linker scripts are text files.
3261
3262 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3263 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3264 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3265 generally ignored.
3266
3267 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3268 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3269 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3270 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3271 file name.
3272
3273 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3274 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3275 to whitespace.
3276
3277 @node Simple Example
3278 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3279 @cindex linker script example
3280 @cindex example of linker script
3281 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3282
3283 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3284 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3285 memory layout of the output file.
3286
3287 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3288 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3289 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3290 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3291 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3292 your input files.
3293
3294 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3295 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3296 linker script which will do that:
3297 @smallexample
3298 SECTIONS
3299 @{
3300 . = 0x10000;
3301 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3302 . = 0x8000000;
3303 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3304 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3305 @}
3306 @end smallexample
3307
3308 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3309 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3310 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3311
3312 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3313 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3314 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3315 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3316 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3317 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3318 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3319
3320 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3321 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3322 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3323 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3324 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3325 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3326
3327 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3328 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3329 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3330
3331 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3332 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3333 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3334 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3335 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3336 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3337 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3338
3339 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3340 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3341 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3342 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3343 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3344 sections.
3345
3346 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3347
3348 @node Simple Commands
3349 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3350 @cindex linker script simple commands
3351 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3352
3353 @menu
3354 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3355 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3356 @ifclear SingleFormat
3357 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3358 @end ifclear
3359
3360 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3361 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3362 @end menu
3363
3364 @node Entry Point
3365 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3366 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3367 @cindex start of execution
3368 @cindex first instruction
3369 @cindex entry point
3370 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3371 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3372 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3373 @smallexample
3374 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3375 @end smallexample
3376
3377 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3378 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3379 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3380 @itemize @bullet
3381 @item
3382 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3383 @item
3384 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3385 @item
3386 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3387 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3388 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3389 @item
3390 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3391 @item
3392 The address @code{0}.
3393 @end itemize
3394
3395 @node File Commands
3396 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3397 @cindex linker script file commands
3398 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3399
3400 @table @code
3401 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3402 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3403 @cindex including a linker script
3404 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3405 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3406 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3407 10 levels deep.
3408
3409 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3410 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3411
3412 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3413 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3414 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3415 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3416 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3417 @cindex linker script input object files
3418 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3419 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3420
3421 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3422 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3423 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3424
3425 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3426 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3427
3428 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3429 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3430 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3431 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3432 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3433 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3434 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3435 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3436 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3437 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3438
3439 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3440 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3441 @samp{-l}.
3442
3443 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3444 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3445 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3446
3447 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3448 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3449 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3450 @cindex grouping input files
3451 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3452 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3453 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3454 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3455
3456 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3457 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3458 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3459 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3460 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3461 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3462 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3463 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3464 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3465 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3466 setting afterwards.
3467
3468 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3469 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3470 @cindex output file name in linker script
3471 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3472 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3473 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3474 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3475 precedence.
3476
3477 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3478 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3479
3480 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3481 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3482 @cindex library search path in linker script
3483 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3484 @cindex search path in linker script
3485 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3486 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3487 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3488 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3489 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3490 the command line option are searched first.
3491
3492 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3493 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3494 @cindex first input file
3495 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3496 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3497 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3498 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3499 first file.
3500 @end table
3501
3502 @ifclear SingleFormat
3503 @node Format Commands
3504 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3505 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3506
3507 @table @code
3508 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3509 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3510 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3511 @cindex output file format in linker script
3512 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3513 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3514 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3515 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3516 line option takes precedence.
3517
3518 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3519 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3520 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3521 desired endianness.
3522
3523 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3524 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3525 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3526 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3527
3528 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3529 command:
3530 @smallexample
3531 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3532 @end smallexample
3533 This says that the default format for the output file is
3534 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3535 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3536 format.
3537
3538 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3539 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3540 @cindex input file format in linker script
3541 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3542 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3543 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3544 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3545 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3546 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3547 @end table
3548 @end ifclear
3549
3550 @node REGION_ALIAS
3551 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3552 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3553 @cindex region alias
3554 @cindex region names
3555
3556 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3557 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3558
3559 @smallexample
3560 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3561 @end smallexample
3562
3563 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3564 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3565 to memory regions. An example follows.
3566
3567 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3568 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3569 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3570 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3571 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3572 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3573 sections:
3574
3575 @itemize @bullet
3576 @item
3577 @code{.text} program code;
3578 @item
3579 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3580 @item
3581 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3582 @item
3583 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3584 @end itemize
3585
3586 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3587 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3588 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3589 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3590 @code{C}:
3591 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3592 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3593 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3594 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3595 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3596 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3597 @end multitable
3598 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3599 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3600 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3601 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3602
3603 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3604 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3605 memory layout:
3606 @smallexample
3607 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3608
3609 SECTIONS
3610 @{
3611 .text :
3612 @{
3613 *(.text)
3614 @} > REGION_TEXT
3615 .rodata :
3616 @{
3617 *(.rodata)
3618 rodata_end = .;
3619 @} > REGION_RODATA
3620 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3621 @{
3622 data_start = .;
3623 *(.data)
3624 @} > REGION_DATA
3625 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3626 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3627 .bss :
3628 @{
3629 *(.bss)
3630 @} > REGION_BSS
3631 @}
3632 @end smallexample
3633
3634 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3635 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3636 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3637 @table @code
3638 @item A
3639 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3640 @smallexample
3641 MEMORY
3642 @{
3643 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3644 @}
3645
3646 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3647 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3648 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3649 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3650 @end smallexample
3651 @item B
3652 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3653 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3654 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3655 @smallexample
3656 MEMORY
3657 @{
3658 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3659 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3660 @}
3661
3662 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3663 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3664 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3665 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3666 @end smallexample
3667 @item C
3668 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3669 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3670 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3671 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3672 @smallexample
3673 MEMORY
3674 @{
3675 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3676 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3677 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3678 @}
3679
3680 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3681 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3682 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3683 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3684 @end smallexample
3685 @end table
3686
3687 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3688 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3689 necessary:
3690 @smallexample
3691 #include <string.h>
3692
3693 extern char data_start [];
3694 extern char data_size [];
3695 extern char data_load_start [];
3696
3697 void copy_data(void)
3698 @{
3699 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3700 @{
3701 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3702 @}
3703 @}
3704 @end smallexample
3705
3706 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3707 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3708 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3709
3710 @table @code
3711 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3712 @kindex ASSERT
3713 @cindex assertion in linker script
3714 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3715 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3716
3717 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3718 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3719 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3720 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3721 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3722
3723 @smallexample
3724 .stack :
3725 @{
3726 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3727 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3728 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3729 @}
3730 @end smallexample
3731
3732 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3733 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3734 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3735
3736 @smallexample
3737 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3738 .stack :
3739 @{
3740 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3741 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3742 @}
3743 @end smallexample
3744
3745 will work.
3746
3747 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3748 @kindex EXTERN
3749 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3750 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3751 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3752 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3753 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3754 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3755
3756 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3757 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3758 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3759 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3760 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3761 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3762
3763 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3764 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3765 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3766 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3767 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3768 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3769
3770 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3771 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3772 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3773 @cindex section groups
3774 @cindex COMDAT
3775 This command has the same effect as the
3776 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3777 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3778 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3779 specified (@samp{-r}).
3780
3781 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3782 @kindex INSERT
3783 @cindex insert user script into default script
3784 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3785 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3786 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3787 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3788 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3789 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3790 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3791 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3792 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3793 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3794 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3795 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3796 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3797
3798 @smallexample
3799 SECTIONS
3800 @{
3801 OVERLAY :
3802 @{
3803 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3804 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3805 @}
3806 @}
3807 INSERT AFTER .text;
3808 @end smallexample
3809
3810 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3811 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3812 @cindex cross references
3813 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3814 references among certain output sections.
3815
3816 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3817 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3818 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3819 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3820 a function defined in the other section.
3821
3822 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3823 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3824 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3825 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3826 names.
3827
3828 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3829 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3830 @cindex cross references
3831 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3832 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3833
3834 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3835 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3836 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3837 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3838 must never call back.
3839
3840 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3841 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3842 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3843 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3844 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3845 names, not input section names.
3846
3847 @ifclear SingleFormat
3848 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3849 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3850 @cindex machine architecture
3851 @cindex architecture
3852 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3853 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3854 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3855 the @samp{-f} option.
3856 @end ifclear
3857
3858 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3859 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3860 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3861 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3862 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3863 @xref{Expression Section}.
3864 @end table
3865
3866 @node Assignments
3867 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3868 @cindex assignment in scripts
3869 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3870 @cindex variables, defining
3871 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3872 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3873
3874 @menu
3875 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3876 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3877 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3878 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3879 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3880 @end menu
3881
3882 @node Simple Assignments
3883 @subsection Simple Assignments
3884
3885 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3886
3887 @table @code
3888 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3889 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3890 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3891 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3892 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3893 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3894 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3895 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3896 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3897 @end table
3898
3899 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3900 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3901 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3902
3903 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3904 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3905
3906 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3907
3908 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3909
3910 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3911 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3912 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3913
3914 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3915 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3916
3917 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3918 assignments may be used:
3919
3920 @smallexample
3921 floating_point = 0;
3922 SECTIONS
3923 @{
3924 .text :
3925 @{
3926 *(.text)
3927 _etext = .;
3928 @}
3929 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3930 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3931 @}
3932 @end smallexample
3933 @noindent
3934 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3935 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3936 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3937 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3938 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3939
3940 @node HIDDEN
3941 @subsection HIDDEN
3942 @cindex HIDDEN
3943 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3944 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3945
3946 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3947 @code{HIDDEN}:
3948
3949 @smallexample
3950 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3951 SECTIONS
3952 @{
3953 .text :
3954 @{
3955 *(.text)
3956 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3957 @}
3958 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3959 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3960 @}
3961 @end smallexample
3962 @noindent
3963 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3964
3965 @node PROVIDE
3966 @subsection PROVIDE
3967 @cindex PROVIDE
3968 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3969 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3970 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3971 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3972 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3973 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3974 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3975 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3976
3977 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3978 @smallexample
3979 SECTIONS
3980 @{
3981 .text :
3982 @{
3983 *(.text)
3984 _etext = .;
3985 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3986 @}
3987 @}
3988 @end smallexample
3989
3990 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3991 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3992 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3993 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3994 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3995 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3996
3997 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3998 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3999 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4000 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4001 hidden and won't be exported.
4002
4003 @node Source Code Reference
4004 @subsection Source Code Reference
4005
4006 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4007 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4008 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4009 symbol that does not have a value.
4010
4011 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4012 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4013 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4014 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4015 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4016 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4017 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4018 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4019
4020 @smallexample
4021 extern int foo;
4022 @end smallexample
4023
4024 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4025
4026 @smallexample
4027 _foo = 1000;
4028 @end smallexample
4029
4030 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4031 transformation has taken place.
4032
4033 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4034 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4035 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4036 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4037 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4038 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4039 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4040
4041 @smallexample
4042 int foo = 1000;
4043 @end smallexample
4044
4045 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4046 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4047 number 1000 is initially stored.
4048
4049 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4050 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4051 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4052 So:
4053
4054 @smallexample
4055 foo = 1;
4056 @end smallexample
4057
4058 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4059 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4060 address. Whereas:
4061
4062 @smallexample
4063 int * a = & foo;
4064 @end smallexample
4065
4066 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4067 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4068 the variable @samp{a}.
4069
4070 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4071 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4072 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4073
4074 @smallexample
4075 foo = 1000;
4076 @end smallexample
4077
4078 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4079 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4080 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4081 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4082 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4083
4084 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4085 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4086 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4087 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4088 linker script contains these declarations:
4089
4090 @smallexample
4091 @group
4092 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4093 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4094 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4095 @end group
4096 @end smallexample
4097
4098 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4099
4100 @smallexample
4101 @group
4102 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4103
4104 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4105 @end group
4106 @end smallexample
4107
4108 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4109 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4110 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4111
4112 @smallexample
4113 @group
4114 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4115
4116 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4117 @end group
4118 @end smallexample
4119
4120 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4121 operators.
4122
4123 @node SECTIONS
4124 @section SECTIONS Command
4125 @kindex SECTIONS
4126 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4127 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4128
4129 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4130 @smallexample
4131 SECTIONS
4132 @{
4133 @var{sections-command}
4134 @var{sections-command}
4135 @dots{}
4136 @}
4137 @end smallexample
4138
4139 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4140
4141 @itemize @bullet
4142 @item
4143 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4144 @item
4145 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4146 @item
4147 an output section description
4148 @item
4149 an overlay description
4150 @end itemize
4151
4152 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4153 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4154 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4155 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4156 the layout of the output file.
4157
4158 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4159 below.
4160
4161 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4162 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4163 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4164 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4165 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4166 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4167
4168 @menu
4169 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4170 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4171 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4172 * Input Section:: Input section description
4173 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4174 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4175 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4176 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4177 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4178 @end menu
4179
4180 @node Output Section Description
4181 @subsection Output Section Description
4182 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4183 @smallexample
4184 @group
4185 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4186 [AT(@var{lma})]
4187 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4188 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4189 [@var{constraint}]
4190 @{
4191 @var{output-section-command}
4192 @var{output-section-command}
4193 @dots{}
4194 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4195 @end group
4196 @end smallexample
4197
4198 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4199
4200 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4201 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4202 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4203 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4204 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4205
4206 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4207
4208 @itemize @bullet
4209 @item
4210 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4211 @item
4212 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4213 @item
4214 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4215 @item
4216 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4217 @end itemize
4218
4219 @node Output Section Name
4220 @subsection Output Section Name
4221 @cindex name, section
4222 @cindex section name
4223 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4224 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4225 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4226 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4227 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4228 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4229 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4230 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4231 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4232 commas must be quoted.
4233
4234 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4235 Discarding}.
4236
4237 @node Output Section Address
4238 @subsection Output Section Address
4239 @cindex address, section
4240 @cindex section address
4241 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4242 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4243 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4244
4245 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4246 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4247 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4248 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4249 contained within the output section.
4250
4251 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4252
4253 @itemize @bullet
4254 @item
4255 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4256 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4257 in that region.
4258
4259 @item
4260 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4261 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4262 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4263 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4264
4265 @item
4266 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4267 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4268 counter.
4269 @end itemize
4270
4271 @noindent
4272 For example:
4273
4274 @smallexample
4275 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4276 @end smallexample
4277
4278 @noindent
4279 and
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4283 @end smallexample
4284
4285 @noindent
4286 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4287 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4288 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4289 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4290 input sections.
4291
4292 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4293 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4294 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4295 do something like this:
4296 @smallexample
4297 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4298 @end smallexample
4299 @noindent
4300 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4301 aligned upward to the specified value.
4302
4303 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4304 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4305 sections are ignored).
4306
4307 @node Input Section
4308 @subsection Input Section Description
4309 @cindex input sections
4310 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4311 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4312
4313 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4314 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4315 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4316 map the input files into your memory layout.
4317
4318 @menu
4319 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4320 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4321 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4322 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4323 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4324 @end menu
4325
4326 @node Input Section Basics
4327 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4328 @cindex input section basics
4329 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4330 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4331
4332 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4333 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4334
4335 The most common input section description is to include all input
4336 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4337 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4338 @smallexample
4339 *(.text)
4340 @end smallexample
4341 @noindent
4342 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4343 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4344 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4345 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4346 example:
4347 @smallexample
4348 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4349 @end smallexample
4350 @noindent
4351 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4352 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4353 placed inside the section list, for example:
4354 @smallexample
4355 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4356 @end smallexample
4357 @noindent
4358 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4359 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4360 more than one section, as described below.
4361
4362 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4363 @smallexample
4364 *(.text .rdata)
4365 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4366 @end smallexample
4367 @noindent
4368 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4369 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4370 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4371 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4372 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4373 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4374
4375 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4376 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4377 immediately following section, for example:
4378 @smallexample
4379 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4380 @end smallexample
4381 @noindent
4382 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4383 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4384 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4385 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4386 could be modified to:
4387 @smallexample
4388 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4389 @end smallexample
4390 @noindent
4391 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4392 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4393 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4394 @smallexample
4395 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4396 @end smallexample
4397
4398 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4399 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4400 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4401 @smallexample
4402 data.o(.data)
4403 @end smallexample
4404
4405 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4406 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4407
4408 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4409
4410 @smallexample
4411 @group
4412 SECTIONS @{
4413 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4414 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4415 @}
4416 @end group
4417 @end smallexample
4418
4419 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4420 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4421 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4422 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4423 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4424
4425 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4426 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4427 with no whitespace around the colon.
4428
4429 @table @samp
4430 @item archive:file
4431 matches file within archive
4432 @item archive:
4433 matches the whole archive
4434 @item :file
4435 matches file but not one in an archive
4436 @end table
4437
4438 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4439 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4440 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4441 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4442 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4443 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4444 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4445 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4446 command.
4447
4448 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4449 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4450 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4451 @smallexample
4452 data.o
4453 @end smallexample
4454
4455 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4456 and does not contain any wild card
4457 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4458 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4459 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4460 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4461 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4462 the archive search path.
4463
4464 @node Input Section Wildcards
4465 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4466 @cindex input section wildcards
4467 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4468 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4469 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4470 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4471 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4472
4473 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4474 pattern for the file name.
4475
4476 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4477
4478 @table @samp
4479 @item *
4480 matches any number of characters
4481 @item ?
4482 matches any single character
4483 @item [@var{chars}]
4484 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4485 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4486 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4487 @item \
4488 quotes the following character
4489 @end table
4490
4491 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4492 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4493 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4494 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4495 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4496 a @samp{/} character.
4497
4498 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4499 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4500 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4501
4502 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4503 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4504 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4505 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4506 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4507 @smallexample
4508 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4509 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4510 @end smallexample
4511
4512 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4513 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4514 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4515 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4516 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4517 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4518 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4519
4520 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4521 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4522 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4523 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4524 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4525 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4526
4527 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4528 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4529 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4530 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4531 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4532
4533 @cindex SORT
4534 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4535
4536 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4537 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4538
4539 @enumerate
4540 @item
4541 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4542 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4543 sections have the same name.
4544 @item
4545 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4546 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4547 sections have the same alignment.
4548 @item
4549 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4550 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4551 @item
4552 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4553 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4554 @item
4555 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4556 @end enumerate
4557
4558 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4559 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4560 takes precedence over the command line option.
4561
4562 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4563 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4564 treated as nested sorting command.
4565
4566 @enumerate
4567 @item
4568 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4569 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4570 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4571 @item
4572 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4573 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4574 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4575 @end enumerate
4576
4577 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4578 command line option will be ignored.
4579
4580 @cindex SORT_NONE
4581 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4582 section sorting option.
4583
4584 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4585 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4586 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4587
4588 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4589 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4590 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4591 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4592 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4593 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4594 @smallexample
4595 @group
4596 SECTIONS @{
4597 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4598 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4599 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4600 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4601 @}
4602 @end group
4603 @end smallexample
4604
4605 @node Input Section Common
4606 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4607 @cindex common symbol placement
4608 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4609 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4610 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4611 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4612 named @samp{COMMON}.
4613
4614 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4615 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4616 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4617 input files are placed in another section.
4618
4619 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4620 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4621 @smallexample
4622 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4623 @end smallexample
4624
4625 @cindex scommon section
4626 @cindex small common symbols
4627 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4628 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4629 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4630 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4631 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4632 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4633 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4634 locations.
4635
4636 @cindex [COMMON]
4637 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4638 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4639 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4640
4641 @node Input Section Keep
4642 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4643 @cindex KEEP
4644 @cindex garbage collection
4645 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4646 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4647 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4648 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4649 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4650
4651 @node Input Section Example
4652 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4653 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4654 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4655 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4656 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4657 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4658 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4659 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4660 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4661 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4662
4663 @smallexample
4664 @group
4665 SECTIONS @{
4666 outputa 0x10000 :
4667 @{
4668 all.o
4669 foo.o (.input1)
4670 @}
4671 @end group
4672 @group
4673 outputb :
4674 @{
4675 foo.o (.input2)
4676 foo1.o (.input1)
4677 @}
4678 @end group
4679 @group
4680 outputc :
4681 @{
4682 *(.input1)
4683 *(.input2)
4684 @}
4685 @}
4686 @end group
4687 @end smallexample
4688
4689 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4690 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4691 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4692 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4693 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4694 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4695 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4696
4697 @node Output Section Data
4698 @subsection Output Section Data
4699 @cindex data
4700 @cindex section data
4701 @cindex output section data
4702 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4703 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4704 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4705 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4706 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4707 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4708 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4709 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4710 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4711 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4712 counter.
4713
4714 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4715 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4716 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4717 stored.
4718
4719 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4720 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4721 @smallexample
4722 BYTE(1)
4723 LONG(addr)
4724 @end smallexample
4725
4726 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4727 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4728 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4729 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4730 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4731
4732 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4733 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4734 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4735 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4736 endianness of the first input object file.
4737
4738 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4739 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4740 @smallexample
4741 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4742 @end smallexample
4743 whereas this will work:
4744 @smallexample
4745 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4746 @end smallexample
4747
4748 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4749 @cindex holes, filling
4750 @cindex unspecified memory
4751 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4752 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4753 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4754 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4755 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4756 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4757 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4758 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4759 different parts of an output section.
4760
4761 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4762 value @samp{0x90}:
4763 @smallexample
4764 FILL(0x90909090)
4765 @end smallexample
4766
4767 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4768 section attribute, but it only affects the
4769 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4770 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4771 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4772 expression.
4773
4774 @node Output Section Keywords
4775 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4776 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4777 commands.
4778
4779 @table @code
4780 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4781 @cindex input filename symbols
4782 @cindex filename symbols
4783 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4784 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4785 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4786 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4787 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4788
4789 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4790 normally used for any other object file format.
4791
4792 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4793 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4794 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4795 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4796 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4797 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4798 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4799 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4800 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4801 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4802 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4803 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4804 ignored for other object file formats.
4805
4806 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4807 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4808 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4809 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4810 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4811 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4812 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4813 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4814 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4815 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4816 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4817 @code{exit}.
4818
4819 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4820 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4821 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4822 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4823 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4824 runtime code expects to see.
4825
4826 @smallexample
4827 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4828 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4829 *(.ctors)
4830 LONG(0)
4831 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4832 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4833 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4834 *(.dtors)
4835 LONG(0)
4836 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4837 @end smallexample
4838
4839 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4840 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4841 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4842 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4843 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4844 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4845 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4846 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4847
4848 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4849 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4850 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4851 scripts.
4852
4853 @end table
4854
4855 @node Output Section Discarding
4856 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4857 @cindex discarding sections
4858 @cindex sections, discarding
4859 @cindex removing sections
4860 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4861 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4862 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4863 @smallexample
4864 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4865 @end smallexample
4866 @noindent
4867 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4868 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4869 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4870 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4871 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4872 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4873 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4874 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4875 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4876
4877 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4878 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4879 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4880 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4881 section is discarded.
4882
4883 @cindex /DISCARD/
4884 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4885 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4886 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4887
4888 @node Output Section Attributes
4889 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4890 @cindex output section attributes
4891 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4892 like this:
4893
4894 @smallexample
4895 @group
4896 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4897 [AT(@var{lma})]
4898 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4899 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4900 [@var{constraint}]
4901 @{
4902 @var{output-section-command}
4903 @var{output-section-command}
4904 @dots{}
4905 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4906 @end group
4907 @end smallexample
4908
4909 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4910 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4911 remaining section attributes.
4912
4913 @menu
4914 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4915 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4916 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4917 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4918 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4919 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4920 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4921 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4922 @end menu
4923
4924 @node Output Section Type
4925 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4926 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4927 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4928
4929 @table @code
4930 @item NOLOAD
4931 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4932 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4933 @item DSECT
4934 @itemx COPY
4935 @itemx INFO
4936 @itemx OVERLAY
4937 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4938 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4939 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4940 section when the program is run.
4941 @end table
4942
4943 @kindex NOLOAD
4944 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4945 @cindex loading, preventing
4946 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4947 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4948 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4949 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4950 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4951 @smallexample
4952 @group
4953 SECTIONS @{
4954 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4955 @dots{}
4956 @}
4957 @end group
4958 @end smallexample
4959
4960 @node Output Section LMA
4961 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4962 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4963 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4964 @cindex load address
4965 @cindex section load address
4966 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4967 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4968 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4969 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4970 address is optional.
4971
4972 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4973 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4974 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4975 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4976 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4977
4978 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4979 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4980 load address:
4981
4982 @itemize @bullet
4983 @item
4984 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4985 the LMA address as well.
4986
4987 @item
4988 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4989
4990 @item
4991 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4992 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4993 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4994 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4995 the last section in the located region.
4996
4997 @item
4998 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4999 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5000
5001 @item
5002 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5003 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5004 @end itemize
5005
5006 @cindex ROM initialized data
5007 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5008 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5009 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5010 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5011 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5012 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5013 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5014 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5015 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 SECTIONS
5020 @{
5021 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5022 .mdata 0x2000 :
5023 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5024 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5025 .bss 0x3000 :
5026 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5027 @}
5028 @end group
5029 @end smallexample
5030
5031 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5032 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5033 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5034 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5035 script.
5036
5037 @smallexample
5038 @group
5039 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5040 char *src = &_etext;
5041 char *dst = &_data;
5042
5043 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5044 while (dst < &_edata)
5045 *dst++ = *src++;
5046
5047 /* Zero bss. */
5048 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5049 *dst = 0;
5050 @end group
5051 @end smallexample
5052
5053 @node Forced Output Alignment
5054 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5055 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5056 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5057 @cindex output section alignment
5058 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5059 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5060 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5061
5062 @node Forced Input Alignment
5063 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5064 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5065 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5066 @cindex input section alignment
5067 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5068 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5069 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5070
5071 @node Output Section Constraint
5072 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5073 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5074 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5075 @cindex constraints on output sections
5076 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5077 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5078 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5079 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5080
5081 @node Output Section Region
5082 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5083 @kindex >@var{region}
5084 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5085 @cindex memory regions and sections
5086 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5087 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5088
5089 Here is a simple example:
5090 @smallexample
5091 @group
5092 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5093 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5094 @end group
5095 @end smallexample
5096
5097 @node Output Section Phdr
5098 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5099 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5100 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5101 @cindex program headers and sections
5102 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5103 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5104 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5105 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5106 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5107 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5108
5109 Here is a simple example:
5110 @smallexample
5111 @group
5112 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5113 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5114 @end group
5115 @end smallexample
5116
5117 @node Output Section Fill
5118 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5119 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5120 @cindex section fill pattern
5121 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5122 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5123 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5124 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5125 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5126 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5127 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5128 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5129 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5130 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5131 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5132 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5133 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5134
5135 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5136 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5137
5138 Here is a simple example:
5139 @smallexample
5140 @group
5141 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5142 @end group
5143 @end smallexample
5144
5145 @node Overlay Description
5146 @subsection Overlay Description
5147 @kindex OVERLAY
5148 @cindex overlays
5149 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5150 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5151 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5152 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5153 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5154 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5155 than another.
5156
5157 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5158 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5159 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5160 command is as follows:
5161 @smallexample
5162 @group
5163 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5164 @{
5165 @var{secname1}
5166 @{
5167 @var{output-section-command}
5168 @var{output-section-command}
5169 @dots{}
5170 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5171 @var{secname2}
5172 @{
5173 @var{output-section-command}
5174 @var{output-section-command}
5175 @dots{}
5176 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5177 @dots{}
5178 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5179 @end group
5180 @end smallexample
5181
5182 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5183 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5184 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5185 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5186 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5187 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5188
5189 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5190 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5191
5192 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5193 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5194 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5195 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5196 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5197 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5198
5199 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5200 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5201 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5202 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5203 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5204
5205 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5206 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5207 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5208 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5209 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5210 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5211 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5212
5213 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5214 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5215
5216 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5217 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5218 @smallexample
5219 @group
5220 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5221 @{
5222 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5223 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5224 @}
5225 @end group
5226 @end smallexample
5227 @noindent
5228 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5229 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5230 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5231 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5232 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5233 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5234
5235 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5236 like the following.
5237
5238 @smallexample
5239 @group
5240 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5241 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5242 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5243 @end group
5244 @end smallexample
5245
5246 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5247 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5248 example could have been written identically as follows.
5249
5250 @smallexample
5251 @group
5252 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5253 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5254 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5255 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5256 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5257 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5258 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5259 @end group
5260 @end smallexample
5261
5262 @node MEMORY
5263 @section MEMORY Command
5264 @kindex MEMORY
5265 @cindex memory regions
5266 @cindex regions of memory
5267 @cindex allocating memory
5268 @cindex discontinuous memory
5269 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5270 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5271
5272 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5273 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5274 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5275 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5276 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5277 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5278 around to fit into the available regions.
5279
5280 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5281 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5282 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5283 @code{MEMORY} is:
5284 @smallexample
5285 @group
5286 MEMORY
5287 @{
5288 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5289 @dots{}
5290 @}
5291 @end group
5292 @end smallexample
5293
5294 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5295 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5296 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5297 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5298 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5299 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5300 command.
5301
5302 @cindex memory region attributes
5303 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5304 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5305 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5306 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5307 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5308 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5309 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5310
5311 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5312 @table @samp
5313 @item R
5314 Read-only section
5315 @item W
5316 Read/write section
5317 @item X
5318 Executable section
5319 @item A
5320 Allocatable section
5321 @item I
5322 Initialized section
5323 @item L
5324 Same as @samp{I}
5325 @item !
5326 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5327 @end table
5328
5329 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5330 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5331 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5332 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5333 attributes.
5334
5335 @kindex ORIGIN =
5336 @kindex o =
5337 @kindex org =
5338 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5339 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5340 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5341 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5342 @code{ORG}).
5343
5344 @kindex LENGTH =
5345 @kindex len =
5346 @kindex l =
5347 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5348 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5349 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5350 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5351
5352 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5353 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5354 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5355 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5356 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5357 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5358 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5359 region.
5360
5361 @smallexample
5362 @group
5363 MEMORY
5364 @{
5365 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5366 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5367 @}
5368 @end group
5369 @end smallexample
5370
5371 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5372 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5373 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5374 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5375 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5376 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5377 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5378 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5379 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5380
5381 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5382 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5383 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5384
5385 @smallexample
5386 @group
5387 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5388 @end group
5389 @end smallexample
5390
5391 @node PHDRS
5392 @section PHDRS Command
5393 @kindex PHDRS
5394 @cindex program headers
5395 @cindex ELF program headers
5396 @cindex program segments
5397 @cindex segments, ELF
5398 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5399 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5400 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5401 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5402
5403 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5404 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5405 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5406 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5407 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5408
5409 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5410 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5411 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5412 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5413 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5414
5415 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5416 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5417 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5418
5419 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5420 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5421
5422 @smallexample
5423 @group
5424 PHDRS
5425 @{
5426 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5427 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5428 @}
5429 @end group
5430 @end smallexample
5431
5432 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5433 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5434 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5435 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5436 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5437 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5438
5439 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5440 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5441 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5442 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5443 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5444 Section Phdr}.
5445
5446 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5447 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5448 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5449 contain the section.
5450
5451 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5452 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5453 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5454 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5455 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5456 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5457 segment at all.
5458
5459 @kindex FILEHDR
5460 @kindex PHDRS
5461 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5462 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5463 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5464 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5465 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5466 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5467 these keywords.
5468
5469 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5470 value of the keyword.
5471
5472 @table @asis
5473 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5474 Indicates an unused program header.
5475
5476 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5477 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5478 the file.
5479
5480 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5481 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5482
5483 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5484 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5485 found.
5486
5487 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5488 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5489
5490 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5491 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5492 ABI.
5493
5494 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5495 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5496
5497 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5498 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5499
5500 @item @var{expression}
5501 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5502 be used for types not defined above.
5503 @end table
5504
5505 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5506 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5507 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5508 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5509 output section attribute.
5510
5511 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5512 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5513 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5514 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5515 header.
5516
5517 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5518 headers used on a native ELF system.
5519
5520 @example
5521 @group
5522 PHDRS
5523 @{
5524 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5525 interp PT_INTERP ;
5526 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5527 data PT_LOAD ;
5528 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5529 @}
5530
5531 SECTIONS
5532 @{
5533 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5534 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5535 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5536 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5537 @dots{}
5538 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5539 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5540 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5541 @dots{}
5542 @}
5543 @end group
5544 @end example
5545
5546 @node VERSION
5547 @section VERSION Command
5548 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5549 @cindex symbol versions
5550 @cindex version script
5551 @cindex versions of symbols
5552 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5553 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5554 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5555 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5556 shared library.
5557
5558 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5559 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5560 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5561
5562 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5563 @smallexample
5564 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5565 @end smallexample
5566
5567 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5568 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5569 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5570 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5571 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5572 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5573 library.
5574
5575 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5576 examples.
5577
5578 @smallexample
5579 VERS_1.1 @{
5580 global:
5581 foo1;
5582 local:
5583 old*;
5584 original*;
5585 new*;
5586 @};
5587
5588 VERS_1.2 @{
5589 foo2;
5590 @} VERS_1.1;
5591
5592 VERS_2.0 @{
5593 bar1; bar2;
5594 extern "C++" @{
5595 ns::*;
5596 "f(int, double)";
5597 @};
5598 @} VERS_1.2;
5599 @end smallexample
5600
5601 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5602 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5603 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5604 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5605 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5606 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5607 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5608 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5609 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5610 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5611
5612 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5613 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5614 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5615
5616 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5617 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5618 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5619
5620 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5621 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5622 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5623 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5624 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5625 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5626 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5627 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5628 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5629
5630 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5631 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5632 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5633 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5634
5635 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5636 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5637 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5638 won't.
5639
5640 @smallexample
5641 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5642 @end smallexample
5643
5644 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5645 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5646 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5647 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5648 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5649 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5650 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5651 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5652 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5653 search for each symbol reference.
5654
5655 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5656 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5657 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5658 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5659 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5660 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5661 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5662 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5663 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5664
5665 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5666 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5667 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5668 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5669 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5670 @smallexample
5671 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5672 @end smallexample
5673 @noindent
5674 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5675 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5676 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5677 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5678 takes precedence over a version script.
5679
5680 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5681 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5682 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5683 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5684 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5685
5686 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5687 source file. Here is an example:
5688
5689 @smallexample
5690 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5691 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5692 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5693 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5694 @end smallexample
5695
5696 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5697 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5698 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5699 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5700
5701 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5702 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5703 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5704 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5705 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5706 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5707
5708 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5709 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5710 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5711 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5712
5713 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5714
5715 @smallexample
5716 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5717 @end smallexample
5718
5719 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5720 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5721 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5722 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5723 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5724
5725 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5726 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5727 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5728 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5729 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5730 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5731 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5732 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5733 expect when you upgrade.
5734
5735 @node Expressions
5736 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5737 @cindex expressions
5738 @cindex arithmetic
5739 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5740 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5741 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5742 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5743
5744 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5745
5746 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5747 expressions.
5748
5749 @menu
5750 * Constants:: Constants
5751 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5752 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5753 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5754 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5755 * Operators:: Operators
5756 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5757 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5758 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5759 @end menu
5760
5761 @node Constants
5762 @subsection Constants
5763 @cindex integer notation
5764 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5765 All constants are integers.
5766
5767 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5768 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5769 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5770 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5771 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5772 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5773
5774 @cindex scaled integers
5775 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5776 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5777 @cindex suffixes for integers
5778 @cindex integer suffixes
5779 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5780 constant by
5781 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5782 @ifnottex
5783 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5784 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5785 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5786 @end ifnottex
5787 @tex
5788 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5789 @end tex
5790 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5791 respectively. For example, the following
5792 all refer to the same quantity:
5793
5794 @smallexample
5795 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5796 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5797 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5798 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5799 @end smallexample
5800
5801 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5802 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5803
5804 @node Symbolic Constants
5805 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5806 @cindex symbolic constants
5807 @kindex CONSTANT
5808 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5809 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5810
5811 @table @code
5812 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5813 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5814 The target's maximum page size.
5815
5816 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5817 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5818 The target's default page size.
5819 @end table
5820
5821 So for example:
5822
5823 @smallexample
5824 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5825 @end smallexample
5826
5827 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5828 supported by the target.
5829
5830 @node Symbols
5831 @subsection Symbol Names
5832 @cindex symbol names
5833 @cindex names
5834 @cindex quoted symbol names
5835 @kindex "
5836 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5837 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5838 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5839 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5840 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5841 @smallexample
5842 "SECTION" = 9;
5843 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5844 @end smallexample
5845
5846 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5847 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5848 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5849
5850 @node Orphan Sections
5851 @subsection Orphan Sections
5852 @cindex orphan
5853 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5854 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5855 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5856 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5857 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5858
5859 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5860 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5861 placed at the end of that output section.
5862
5863 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5864 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5865 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5866 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5867 one new output section.
5868
5869 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5870 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5871 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5872 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5873 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5874 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5875 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5876
5877 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5878 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5879 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5880
5881 @node Location Counter
5882 @subsection The Location Counter
5883 @kindex .
5884 @cindex dot
5885 @cindex location counter
5886 @cindex current output location
5887 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5888 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5889 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5890 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5891 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5892
5893 @cindex holes
5894 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5895 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5896 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5897 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5898 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5899
5900 @smallexample
5901 SECTIONS
5902 @{
5903 output :
5904 @{
5905 file1(.text)
5906 . = . + 1000;
5907 file2(.text)
5908 . += 1000;
5909 file3(.text)
5910 @} = 0x12345678;
5911 @}
5912 @end smallexample
5913 @noindent
5914 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5915 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5916 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5917 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5918 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5919 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5920
5921 @cindex dot inside sections
5922 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5923 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5924 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5925 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5926 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5927 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5928
5929 @smallexample
5930 SECTIONS
5931 @{
5932 . = 0x100
5933 .text: @{
5934 *(.text)
5935 . = 0x200
5936 @}
5937 . = 0x500
5938 .data: @{
5939 *(.data)
5940 . += 0x600
5941 @}
5942 @}
5943 @end smallexample
5944
5945 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5946 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5947 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5948 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5949 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5950 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5951 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5952 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5953
5954 @cindex dot outside sections
5955 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5956 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5957 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5958
5959 @smallexample
5960 SECTIONS
5961 @{
5962 start_of_text = . ;
5963 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5964 end_of_text = . ;
5965
5966 start_of_data = . ;
5967 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5968 end_of_data = . ;
5969 @}
5970 @end smallexample
5971
5972 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5973 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5974 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5975 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5976 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5977 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5978 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5979 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5980 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5981 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5982 as follows:
5983
5984 @smallexample
5985 SECTIONS
5986 @{
5987 start_of_text = . ;
5988 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5989 end_of_text = . ;
5990
5991 start_of_data = . ;
5992 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5993 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5994 end_of_data = . ;
5995 @}
5996 @end smallexample
5997
5998 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5999 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6000 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6001 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6002 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6003 section. So you could write:
6004
6005 @smallexample
6006 SECTIONS
6007 @{
6008 start_of_text = . ;
6009 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6010 end_of_text = . ;
6011
6012 . = . ;
6013 start_of_data = . ;
6014 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6015 end_of_data = . ;
6016 @}
6017 @end smallexample
6018
6019 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6020 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6021
6022 @need 2000
6023 @node Operators
6024 @subsection Operators
6025 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6026 @cindex arithmetic operators
6027 @cindex precedence in expressions
6028 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6029 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6030 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6031 @ifnottex
6032 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6033 @smallexample
6034 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6035 (highest)
6036 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6037 2 left * / %
6038 3 left + -
6039 4 left >> <<
6040 5 left == != > < <= >=
6041 6 left &
6042 7 left |
6043 8 left &&
6044 9 left ||
6045 10 right ? :
6046 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6047 (lowest)
6048 @end smallexample
6049 Notes:
6050 (1) Prefix operators
6051 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6052 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6053 @end ifnottex
6054 @tex
6055 \vskip \baselineskip
6056 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6057 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6058 \hrule
6059 \halign
6060 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6061 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6062 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6063 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6064 \noalign{\hrule}
6065 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6066 &highest&&&&&\cr
6067 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6068 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6069 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6070 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6071 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6072 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6073 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6074 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6075 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6076 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6077 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6078 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6079 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6080 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6081 \hrule}
6082 @end tex
6083 @iftex
6084 {
6085 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6086 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6087 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6088 }
6089 @end iftex
6090 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6091
6092 @node Evaluation
6093 @subsection Evaluation
6094 @cindex lazy evaluation
6095 @cindex expression evaluation order
6096 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6097 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6098
6099 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6100 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6101 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6102 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6103
6104 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6105 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6106 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6107 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6108
6109 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6110 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6111 allocation.
6112
6113 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6114 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6115
6116 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6117 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6118 following
6119 @smallexample
6120 @group
6121 SECTIONS
6122 @{
6123 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6124 @{ *(.text) @}
6125 @}
6126 @end group
6127 @end smallexample
6128 @noindent
6129 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6130 address}.
6131
6132 @node Expression Section
6133 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6134 @cindex expression sections
6135 @cindex absolute expressions
6136 @cindex relative expressions
6137 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6138 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6139 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6140 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6141 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6142 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6143 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6144 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6145 operations.
6146
6147 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6148 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6149 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6150 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6151 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6152 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6153 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6154 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6155 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6156 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6157 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6158 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6159 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6160 everywhere.
6161
6162 In the following simple example,
6163
6164 @smallexample
6165 @group
6166 SECTIONS
6167 @{
6168 . = 0x100;
6169 __executable_start = 0x100;
6170 .data :
6171 @{
6172 . = 0x10;
6173 __data_start = 0x10;
6174 *(.data)
6175 @}
6176 @dots{}
6177 @}
6178 @end group
6179 @end smallexample
6180
6181 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6182 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6183 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6184 section in the second two assignments.
6185
6186 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6187 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6188
6189 @itemize @bullet
6190 @item
6191 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6192 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6193 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6194 @item
6195 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6196 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6197 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6198 @item
6199 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6200 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6201 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6202 before applying the operator.
6203 @end itemize
6204
6205 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6206
6207 @itemize @bullet
6208 @item
6209 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6210 @item
6211 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6212 @item
6213 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6214 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6215 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6216 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6217 but an absolute address otherwise.
6218 @item
6219 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6220 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6221 section as the relative operand(s).
6222 @item
6223 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6224 conversions) is an absolute address.
6225 @end itemize
6226
6227 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6228 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6229 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6230 section @samp{.data}:
6231 @smallexample
6232 SECTIONS
6233 @{
6234 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6235 @}
6236 @end smallexample
6237 @noindent
6238 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6239 @samp{.data} section.
6240
6241 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6242 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6243
6244 @node Builtin Functions
6245 @subsection Builtin Functions
6246 @cindex functions in expressions
6247 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6248 use in linker script expressions.
6249
6250 @table @code
6251 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6252 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6253 @cindex expression, absolute
6254 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6255 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6256 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6257 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6258
6259 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6260 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6261 @cindex section address in expression
6262 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6263 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6264 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6265 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6266 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6267 the other two will be absolute:
6268 @smallexample
6269 @group
6270 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6271 .output1 :
6272 @{
6273 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6274 @dots{}
6275 @}
6276 .output :
6277 @{
6278 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6279 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6280 @}
6281 @dots{} @}
6282 @end group
6283 @end smallexample
6284
6285 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6286 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6287 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6288 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6289 @cindex round up location counter
6290 @cindex align location counter
6291 @cindex round up expression
6292 @cindex align expression
6293 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6294 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6295 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6296 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6297 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6298 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6299
6300 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6301 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6302 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6303 input sections:
6304 @smallexample
6305 @group
6306 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6307 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6308 *(.data)
6309 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6310 @}
6311 @dots{} @}
6312 @end group
6313 @end smallexample
6314 @noindent
6315 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6316 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6317 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6318 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6319
6320 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6321
6322 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6323 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6324 @cindex section alignment
6325 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6326 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6327 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6328 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6329 value in that section.
6330 @smallexample
6331 @group
6332 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6333 .output @{
6334 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6335 @dots{}
6336 @}
6337 @dots{} @}
6338 @end group
6339 @end smallexample
6340
6341 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6342 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6343 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6344 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6345 section.
6346
6347 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6348 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6349 This is equivalent to either
6350 @smallexample
6351 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6352 @end smallexample
6353 or
6354 @smallexample
6355 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6356 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6357 @end smallexample
6358 @noindent
6359 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6360 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6361 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6362 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6363 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6364 bytes in the on-disk file.
6365
6366 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6367 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6368 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6369 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6370 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6371 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6372 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6373
6374 @noindent
6375 Example:
6376 @smallexample
6377 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6378 @end smallexample
6379
6380 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6381 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6382 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6383 evaluation purposes.
6384
6385 @smallexample
6386 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6387 @end smallexample
6388
6389 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6390 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6391 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6392 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6393 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6394 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6395 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6396 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6397 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6398 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6399 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6400 section alignment.
6401
6402 @smallexample
6403 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6404 @end smallexample
6405
6406 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6407 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6408 @cindex symbol defaults
6409 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6410 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6411 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6412 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6413 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6414 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6415 existed, its value is preserved:
6416
6417 @smallexample
6418 @group
6419 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6420 .text : @{
6421 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6422 @dots{}
6423 @}
6424 @dots{}
6425 @}
6426 @end group
6427 @end smallexample
6428
6429 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6430 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6431 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6432
6433 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6434 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6435 @cindex section load address in expression
6436 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6437 Section LMA}).
6438
6439 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6440 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6441 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6442 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6443
6444 @kindex MAX
6445 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6446 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6447
6448 @kindex MIN
6449 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6450 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6451
6452 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6453 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6454 @cindex unallocated address, next
6455 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6456 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6457 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6458 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6459
6460 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6461 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6462 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6463
6464 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6465 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6466 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6467 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6468 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6469 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6470 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6471 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6472 name.
6473
6474 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6475 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6476 @cindex section size
6477 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6478 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6479 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6480 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6481 @smallexample
6482 @group
6483 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6484 .output @{
6485 .start = . ;
6486 @dots{}
6487 .end = . ;
6488 @}
6489 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6490 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6491 @dots{} @}
6492 @end group
6493 @end smallexample
6494
6495 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6496 @itemx sizeof_headers
6497 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6498 @cindex header size
6499 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6500 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6501 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6502 choose, to facilitate paging.
6503
6504 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6505 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6506 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6507 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6508 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6509 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6510 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6511 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6512 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6513 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6514 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6515 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6516 @end table
6517
6518 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6519 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6520 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6521 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6522 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6523 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6524 linker will report an error.
6525
6526 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6527
6528 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6529 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6530 commands.
6531
6532 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6533 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6534 read. This can affect archive searching.
6535
6536 @ifset GENERIC
6537 @node Machine Dependent
6538 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6539
6540 @cindex machine dependencies
6541 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6542 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6543 functionality are not listed.
6544
6545 @menu
6546 @ifset H8300
6547 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6548 @end ifset
6549 @ifset I960
6550 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6551 @end ifset
6552 @ifset M68HC11
6553 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6554 @end ifset
6555 @ifset ARM
6556 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6557 @end ifset
6558 @ifset HPPA
6559 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6560 @end ifset
6561 @ifset M68K
6562 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6563 @end ifset
6564 @ifset MIPS
6565 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6566 @end ifset
6567 @ifset MMIX
6568 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6569 @end ifset
6570 @ifset MSP430
6571 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6572 @end ifset
6573 @ifset NDS32
6574 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6575 @end ifset
6576 @ifset NIOSII
6577 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6578 @end ifset
6579 @ifset POWERPC
6580 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6581 @end ifset
6582 @ifset POWERPC64
6583 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6584 @end ifset
6585 @ifset S/390
6586 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6587 @end ifset
6588 @ifset SPU
6589 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6590 @end ifset
6591 @ifset TICOFF
6592 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6593 @end ifset
6594 @ifset WIN32
6595 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6596 @end ifset
6597 @ifset XTENSA
6598 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6599 @end ifset
6600 @end menu
6601 @end ifset
6602
6603 @ifset H8300
6604 @ifclear GENERIC
6605 @raisesections
6606 @end ifclear
6607
6608 @node H8/300
6609 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6610
6611 @cindex H8/300 support
6612 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6613 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6614
6615 @table @emph
6616 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6617 @item relaxing address modes
6618 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6619 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6620 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6621 respectively.
6622
6623 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6624 @item synthesizing instructions
6625 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6626 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6627 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6628 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6629 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6630 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6631 top page of memory).
6632
6633 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6634 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6635 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6636 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6637 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6638 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6639 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6640
6641 @item bit manipulation instructions
6642 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6643 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6644 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6645 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6646 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6647 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6648 the top page of memory).
6649
6650 @item system control instructions
6651 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6652 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6653 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6654 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6655 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6656 the top page of memory).
6657 @end table
6658
6659 @ifclear GENERIC
6660 @lowersections
6661 @end ifclear
6662 @end ifset
6663
6664 @ifclear GENERIC
6665 @ifset Renesas
6666 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6667 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6668 @node Renesas
6669 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6670
6671 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6672 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6673 options are required for these chips.
6674 @end ifset
6675 @end ifclear
6676
6677 @ifset I960
6678 @ifclear GENERIC
6679 @raisesections
6680 @end ifclear
6681
6682 @node i960
6683 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6684
6685 @cindex i960 support
6686
6687 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6688 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6689 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6690 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6691 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6692 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6693 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6694
6695 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6696 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6697 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6698 the names
6699
6700 @smallexample
6701 @group
6702 try
6703 libtry.a
6704 tryca
6705 libtryca.a
6706 @end group
6707 @end smallexample
6708
6709 @noindent
6710 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6711 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6712
6713 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6714 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6715 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6716 specifies a library.
6717
6718 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6719 @cindex relaxing on i960
6720 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6721 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6722 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6723 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6724 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6725 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6726 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6727 not itself call any subroutines).
6728
6729 @ifclear GENERIC
6730 @lowersections
6731 @end ifclear
6732 @end ifset
6733
6734 @ifset ARM
6735 @ifclear GENERIC
6736 @raisesections
6737 @end ifclear
6738
6739 @ifset M68HC11
6740 @ifclear GENERIC
6741 @raisesections
6742 @end ifclear
6743
6744 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6745 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6746
6747 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6748
6749 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6750
6751 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6752 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6753
6754 @table @emph
6755 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6756 @item relaxing address modes
6757 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6758 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6759 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6760 respectively.
6761
6762 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6763 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6764 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6765
6766 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6767 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6768 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6769 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6770 @code{bset} instructions.
6771
6772 @end table
6773
6774 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6775
6776 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6777 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6778 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6779 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6780 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6781 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6782 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6783 point to the function trampoline.
6784
6785 @ifclear GENERIC
6786 @lowersections
6787 @end ifclear
6788 @end ifset
6789
6790 @node ARM
6791 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6792
6793 @cindex ARM interworking support
6794 @kindex --support-old-code
6795 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6796 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6797 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6798 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6799 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6800 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6801 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6802 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6803 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6804 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6805
6806 @cindex thumb entry point
6807 @cindex entry point, thumb
6808 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6809 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6810 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6811 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6812 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6813 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6814
6815 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6816 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6817 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6818 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6819 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6820 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6821
6822 @cindex BE8
6823 @kindex --be8
6824 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6825 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6826 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6827 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6828 little-endian code.
6829
6830 @cindex TARGET1
6831 @kindex --target1-rel
6832 @kindex --target1-abs
6833 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6834 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6835 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6836 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6837
6838 @cindex TARGET2
6839 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6840 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6841 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6842 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6843 @table @samp
6844 @item rel
6845 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6846 @item abs
6847 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6848 @item got-rel
6849 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6850 @end table
6851
6852 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6853 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6854 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6855 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6856 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6857 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6858
6859 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6860 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6861 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6862
6863 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6864 relocations are ignored.
6865
6866 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6867 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6868 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6869 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6870
6871 @smallexample
6872 TST rM, #1
6873 MOVEQ PC, rM
6874 BX Rn
6875 @end smallexample
6876
6877 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6878 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6879 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6880
6881 @cindex USE_BLX
6882 @kindex --use-blx
6883 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6884 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6885 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6886 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6887 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6888
6889 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6890 specify it if you are using that target.
6891
6892 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6893 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6894 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6895 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6896 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6897 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6898 the support code can read the intended values.
6899
6900 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6901 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6902 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6903 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6904 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6905 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6906
6907 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6908 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6909 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6910 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6911 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6912 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6913
6914 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6915 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6916 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6917 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6918 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6919 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6920 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6921
6922 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6923 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6924 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6925 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6926 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6927 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6928 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6929
6930 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6931 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6932 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6933
6934 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6935 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6936
6937 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6938 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6939 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6940 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6941 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6942 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6943 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6944 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6945
6946 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6947 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6948
6949 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6950 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6951 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6952 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6953 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6954
6955 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6956 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6957 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6958 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6959 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6960 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6961
6962 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6963 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6964
6965 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6966 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6967 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6968 occurs.
6969
6970 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6971 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6972 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6973 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6974 occurs.
6975
6976 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6977 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6978 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6979 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6980 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6981 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6982 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6983 not be diagnosed.
6984
6985 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6986 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6987 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6988 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6989 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6990 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6991 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6992
6993 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6994 @kindex --pic-veneer
6995 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6996 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6997 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6998 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6999
7000 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7001 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7002 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7003 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7004 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7005 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7006 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7007 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7008 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7009 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7010 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7011 where they should be placed.
7012
7013 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7014 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7015 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7016 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7017 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7018 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7019 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7020 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7021 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7022 from the input sections.
7023
7024 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7025 @samp{N = +1}.
7026
7027 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7028 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7029 otherwise.
7030
7031 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7032 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7033 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7034 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7035
7036 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7037
7038 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7039 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7040 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7041 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7042
7043 Please contact ARM for further details.
7044
7045 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7046 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7047 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7048 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7049
7050 @kindex --long-plt
7051 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7052 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7053 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7054 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7055
7056 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7057 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7058 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7059 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7060
7061 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7062 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7063 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7064 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7065 veneers in memory.
7066
7067 @kindex --cmse-implib
7068 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7069 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7070 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7071 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7072 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7073
7074 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7075 @cindex Input import library
7076 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7077 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7078 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7079 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7080 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7081 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7082 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7083 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7084 specified.
7085
7086 @ifclear GENERIC
7087 @lowersections
7088 @end ifclear
7089 @end ifset
7090
7091 @ifset HPPA
7092 @ifclear GENERIC
7093 @raisesections
7094 @end ifclear
7095
7096 @node HPPA ELF32
7097 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7098 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7099 @kindex --multi-subspace
7100 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7101 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7102 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7103 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7104 multiple sub-spaces.
7105
7106 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7107 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7108 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7109 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7110 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7111 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7112 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7113 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7114 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7115 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7116 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7117 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7118 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7119 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7120 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7121 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7122
7123 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7124 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7125 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7126 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7127
7128 @ifclear GENERIC
7129 @lowersections
7130 @end ifclear
7131 @end ifset
7132
7133 @ifset M68K
7134 @ifclear GENERIC
7135 @raisesections
7136 @end ifclear
7137
7138 @node M68K
7139 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7140
7141 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7142 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7143 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7144 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7145 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7146 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7147 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7148 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7149 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7150 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7151 support such GOTs.
7152 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7153 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7154 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7155 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7156
7157 @ifclear GENERIC
7158 @lowersections
7159 @end ifclear
7160 @end ifset
7161
7162 @ifset MIPS
7163 @ifclear GENERIC
7164 @raisesections
7165 @end ifclear
7166
7167 @node MIPS
7168 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7169
7170 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7171 @kindex --insn32
7172 @kindex --no-insn32
7173 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7174 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7175 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7176 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7177 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7178 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7179
7180 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7181 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7182 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7183 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7184 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7185 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7186 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7187 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7188 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7189 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7190 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7191 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7192
7193 @ifclear GENERIC
7194 @lowersections
7195 @end ifclear
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset MMIX
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @raisesections
7201 @end ifclear
7202
7203 @node MMIX
7204 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7205 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7206 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7207 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7208 can translate between the two formats.
7209
7210 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7211 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7212 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7213 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7214 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7215 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7216 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7217 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7218
7219 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7220 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7221 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7222 of a section.
7223
7224 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7225 are left out from an mmo file.
7226
7227 @ifclear GENERIC
7228 @lowersections
7229 @end ifclear
7230 @end ifset
7231
7232 @ifset MSP430
7233 @ifclear GENERIC
7234 @raisesections
7235 @end ifclear
7236
7237 @node MSP430
7238 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7239 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7240 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7241 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7242
7243 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7244 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7245
7246 @table @code
7247 @item @samp{.vectors}
7248 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7249
7250 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7251 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7252 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7253
7254 @item @samp{.infomem}
7255 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7256 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7257
7258 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7259 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7260 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7261
7262 @item @samp{.noinit}
7263 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7264
7265 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7266 @end table
7267
7268 @table @option
7269 @cindex MSP430 Options
7270 @kindex --code-region
7271 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7272 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7273 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7274 using this option.
7275
7276 @kindex --data-region
7277 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7278 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7279 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7280 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7281
7282 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7283 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7284 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7285 and @code{--data-region} options.
7286 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7287 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7288 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7289 @end table
7290
7291 @ifclear GENERIC
7292 @lowersections
7293 @end ifclear
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset NDS32
7297 @ifclear GENERIC
7298 @raisesections
7299 @end ifclear
7300
7301 @node NDS32
7302 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7303 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7304 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7305 relaxes objects according to these options.
7306
7307 @table @code
7308 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7309 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7310
7311 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7312 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7313
7314 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7315 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7316
7317 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7318 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7319
7320 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7321 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7322
7323 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7324 Update the existing EX9 table.
7325
7326 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7327 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7328
7329 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7330 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7331
7332 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7333 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7334
7335 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7336 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7337 @end table
7338
7339 @ifclear GENERIC
7340 @lowersections
7341 @end ifclear
7342 @end ifset
7343
7344 @ifset NIOSII
7345 @ifclear GENERIC
7346 @raisesections
7347 @end ifclear
7348
7349 @node Nios II
7350 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7351 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7352 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7353
7354 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7355 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7356 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7357 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7358 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7359 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7360 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7361 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7362 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7363 larger than 256MB.
7364
7365 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7366 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7367 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7368 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7369 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7370 register as a temporary.
7371
7372 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7373 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7374 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7375
7376 @ifclear GENERIC
7377 @lowersections
7378 @end ifclear
7379 @end ifset
7380
7381 @ifset POWERPC
7382 @ifclear GENERIC
7383 @raisesections
7384 @end ifclear
7385
7386 @node PowerPC ELF32
7387 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7388 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7389 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7390 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7391 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7392 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7393 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7394 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7395 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7396 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7397 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7398 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7399 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7400
7401 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7402 @table @option
7403 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7404 @kindex --bss-plt
7405 @item --bss-plt
7406 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7407 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7408 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7409 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7410 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7411 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7412 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7413 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7414
7415 @kindex --secure-plt
7416 @item --secure-plt
7417 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7418 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7419 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7420 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7421 style BSS PLT.
7422
7423 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7424 @kindex --sdata-got
7425 @item --sdata-got
7426 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7427 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7428 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7429 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7430 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7431 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7432 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7433 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7434 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7435 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7436 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7437 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7438
7439 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7440 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7441 @item --emit-stub-syms
7442 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7443 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7444
7445 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7446 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7447 @item --no-tls-optimize
7448 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7449 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7450 disable the optimization.
7451 @end table
7452
7453 @ifclear GENERIC
7454 @lowersections
7455 @end ifclear
7456 @end ifset
7457
7458 @ifset POWERPC64
7459 @ifclear GENERIC
7460 @raisesections
7461 @end ifclear
7462
7463 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7464 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7465
7466 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7467 @table @option
7468 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7469 @kindex --stub-group-size
7470 @item --stub-group-size
7471 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7472 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7473 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7474 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7475 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7476 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7477 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7478 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7479 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7480 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7481 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7482 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7483 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7484 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7485
7486 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7487 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7488 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7489 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7490
7491 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7492 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7493 @item --emit-stub-syms
7494 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7495 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7496
7497 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7498 @kindex --dotsyms
7499 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7500 @item --dotsyms
7501 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7502 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7503 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7504 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7505 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7506 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7507 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7508 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7509 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7510 feature.
7511
7512 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7513 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7514 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7515 @item --save-restore-funcs
7516 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7517 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7518 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7519 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7520 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7521 link.
7522
7523 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7524 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7525 @item --no-tls-optimize
7526 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7527 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7528 disable the optimization.
7529
7530 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7531 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7532 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7533 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7534 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7535 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7536 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7537 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7538 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7539 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7540 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7541 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7542 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7543 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7544 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7545
7546 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7547 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7548 @item --no-opd-optimize
7549 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7550 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7551 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7552 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7553
7554 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7555 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7556 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7557 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7558 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7559 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7560 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7561
7562 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7563 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7564 @item --no-toc-optimize
7565 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7566 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7567 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7568 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7569 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7570 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7571 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7572 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7573 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7574 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7575 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7576 optimization.
7577
7578 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7579 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7580 @item --no-multi-toc
7581 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7582 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7583 where TOC
7584 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7585 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7586 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7587 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7588 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7589 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7590 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7591 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7592
7593 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7594 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7595 @item --no-toc-sort
7596 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7597 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7598 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7599 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7600 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7601 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7602 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7603 off this feature.
7604
7605 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7606 @kindex --plt-align
7607 @kindex --no-plt-align
7608 @item --plt-align
7609 @itemx --no-plt-align
7610 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7611 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7612 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7613 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7614 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7615 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7616 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7617
7618 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7619 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7620 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7621 @item --plt-static-chain
7622 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7623 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7624 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7625 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7626
7627 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7628 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7629 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7630 @item --plt-thread-safe
7631 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7632 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7633 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7634 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7635 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7636 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7637 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7638 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7639 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7640 default behaviour.
7641
7642 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7643 @kindex --plt-localentry
7644 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7645 @item --plt-localentry
7646 @itemx --no-localentry
7647 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7648 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7649 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7650 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7651 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7652 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7653 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7654 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7655 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7656 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7657 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7658 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7659 @end table
7660
7661 @ifclear GENERIC
7662 @lowersections
7663 @end ifclear
7664 @end ifset
7665
7666 @ifset S/390
7667 @ifclear GENERIC
7668 @raisesections
7669 @end ifclear
7670
7671 @node S/390 ELF
7672 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7673
7674 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7675 @table @option
7676
7677 @cindex S/390
7678 @kindex --s390-pgste
7679 @item --s390-pgste
7680 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7681 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7682 binaries marked that way.
7683 @end table
7684
7685 @ifclear GENERIC
7686 @lowersections
7687 @end ifclear
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset SPU
7691 @ifclear GENERIC
7692 @raisesections
7693 @end ifclear
7694
7695 @node SPU ELF
7696 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7697
7698 @cindex SPU ELF options
7699 @table @option
7700
7701 @cindex SPU plugins
7702 @kindex --plugin
7703 @item --plugin
7704 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7705
7706 @cindex SPU overlays
7707 @kindex --no-overlays
7708 @item --no-overlays
7709 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7710 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7711 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7712 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7713
7714 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7715 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7716 @item --emit-stub-syms
7717 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7718 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7719
7720 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7721 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7722 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7723 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7724 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7725 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7726
7727 @cindex SPU local store size
7728 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7729 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7730 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7731 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7732 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7733
7734 @cindex SPU
7735 @kindex --stack-analysis
7736 @item --stack-analysis
7737 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7738 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7739 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7740 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7741 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7742 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7743 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7744 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7745 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7746 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7747 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7748 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7749 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7750 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7751 and calls will be given.
7752
7753 @cindex SPU
7754 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7755 @item --emit-stack-syms
7756 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7757 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7758 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7759 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7760 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7761 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7762 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7763 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7764 @end table
7765
7766 @ifclear GENERIC
7767 @lowersections
7768 @end ifclear
7769 @end ifset
7770
7771 @ifset TICOFF
7772 @ifclear GENERIC
7773 @raisesections
7774 @end ifclear
7775
7776 @node TI COFF
7777 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7778 @cindex TI COFF versions
7779 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7780 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7781 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7782 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7783 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7784 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7785
7786 @ifclear GENERIC
7787 @lowersections
7788 @end ifclear
7789 @end ifset
7790
7791 @ifset WIN32
7792 @ifclear GENERIC
7793 @raisesections
7794 @end ifclear
7795
7796 @node WIN32
7797 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7798
7799 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7800 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7801 command line options mentioned here.
7802
7803 @table @emph
7804 @cindex import libraries
7805 @item import libraries
7806 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7807 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7808 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7809 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7810 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7811 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7812
7813 @item exporting DLL symbols
7814 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7815 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7816
7817 @table @emph
7818 @item using auto-export functionality
7819 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7820 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7821 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7822
7823 @itemize
7824 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7825 @item --exclude-symbols
7826 @item --exclude-libs
7827 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7828 @item --version-script
7829 @end itemize
7830
7831 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7832 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7833 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7834 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7835 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7836 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7837 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7838 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7839
7840 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7841 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7842 if either of the following are true:
7843
7844 @itemize
7845 @item A DEF file is used.
7846 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7847 @end itemize
7848
7849 @item using a DEF file
7850 @cindex using a DEF file
7851 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7852 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7853 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7854 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7855 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7856
7857 @example
7858 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7859 @end example
7860
7861 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7862 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7863
7864 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7865
7866 @example
7867 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7868
7869 EXPORTS
7870 foo
7871 bar
7872 _bar = bar
7873 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7874 var1 DATA
7875 doo = foo == foo2
7876 eoo DATA == var1
7877 @end example
7878
7879 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7880 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7881 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7882 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7883 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7884 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7885 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7886 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7887 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7888
7889 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7890 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7891 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7892
7893 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7894 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7895 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7896 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7897
7898 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7899 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7900 non-default base address for the image.
7901
7902 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7903 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7904 filename specified on the command line.
7905
7906 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7907
7908 @example
7909 EXPORTS
7910 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7911 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7912 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7913 @end example
7914
7915 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7916 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7917 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7918 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7919 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7920 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7921 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7922
7923 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7924
7925 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7926 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7927 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7928 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7929 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7930
7931 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7932 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7933 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7934 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7935
7936 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7937 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7938 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7939 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7940 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7941 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7942 application will behave unexpectedly.
7943
7944 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7945 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7946 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7947 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7948 the DLL without an import library.
7949
7950 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7951 other DEF file statements
7952
7953 @cindex creating a DEF file
7954 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7955 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7956
7957 @item Using decorations
7958 @cindex Using decorations
7959 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7960 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7961 declared as:
7962
7963 @example
7964 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7965 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7966 @end example
7967
7968 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7969 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7970 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7971 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7972
7973 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7974 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7975 instead:
7976
7977 @example
7978 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7979 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7980 @end example
7981
7982 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7983 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7984 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7985 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7986 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7987 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7988 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7989 information.
7990 @end table
7991
7992 @cindex automatic data imports
7993 @item automatic data imports
7994 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7995 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7996 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7997 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7998 code to these platforms, especially for large
7999 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8000 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8001 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8002 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8003 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8004 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8005 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8006 trigger the feature's use.
8007
8008 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8009 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8010
8011 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8012 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8013
8014 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8015 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8016 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8017 below.
8018
8019 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8020 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8021 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8022 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8023 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8024 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8025 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8026 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8027 references.
8028
8029 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8030 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8031 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8032 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8033 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8034 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8035 run without error on an older system.
8036
8037 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8038 enabled as needed.
8039
8040 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8041 @item direct linking to a dll
8042 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8043 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8044 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8045 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8046 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8047 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8048 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8049 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8050 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8051 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8052
8053 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8054 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8055 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8056 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8057 select the dll instead of an import library.
8058
8059
8060 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8061 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8062
8063 @example
8064 libxxx.dll.a
8065 xxx.dll.a
8066 libxxx.a
8067 xxx.lib
8068 cygxxx.dll (*)
8069 libxxx.dll
8070 xxx.dll
8071 @end example
8072
8073 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8074
8075 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8076 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8077 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8078 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8079 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8080
8081 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8082 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8083 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8084 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8085 could coexist on the same machine.
8086
8087 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8088 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8089 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8090
8091 @example
8092 bin/
8093 cygxxx.dll
8094 lib/
8095 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8096 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8097 @end example
8098
8099 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8100 done two ways:
8101
8102 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8103 @example
8104 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8105 @end example
8106
8107 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8108 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8109 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8110 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8111
8112 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8113 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8114 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8115 making the app/dll.
8116
8117 @example
8118 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8119 @end example
8120
8121 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8122
8123 @example
8124 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8125 @end example
8126
8127 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8128 perfectly legal
8129
8130 @example
8131 bin/
8132 cygxxx-5.dll
8133 lib/
8134 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8135 @end example
8136
8137 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8138 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8139 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8140
8141 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8142 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8143
8144 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8145 work with auto-imported data.
8146
8147 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8148 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8149 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8150 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8151 possible to do this without an import lib.
8152
8153 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8154 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8155 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8156 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8157
8158 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8159 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8160 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8161 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8162 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8163 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8164 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8165
8166 @item symbol aliasing
8167 @table @emph
8168 @item adding additional names
8169 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8170 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8171 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8172 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8173 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8174
8175 @example
8176 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8177
8178 EXPORTS
8179 foo
8180 _foo = foo
8181 @end example
8182
8183 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8184
8185 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8186 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8187
8188 @example
8189 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8190 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8191 @end example
8192
8193 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8194 symbols.
8195
8196 @item renaming symbols
8197 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8198 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8199 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8200 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8201 created). In the following example:
8202
8203 @example
8204 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8205
8206 EXPORTS
8207 _foo = foo
8208 @end example
8209
8210 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8211 @samp{_foo}.
8212 @end table
8213
8214 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8215 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8216 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8217 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8218 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8219 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8220 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8221 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8222 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8223 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8224 which is probably not what you wanted.
8225
8226 @cindex weak externals
8227 @item weak externals
8228 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8229 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8230 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8231 are three variants of weak externals:
8232 @itemize
8233 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8234 called lazy externals.
8235 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8236 This form is not presently implemented.
8237 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8238 implemented.
8239 @end itemize
8240 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8241 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8242 uses a default value.
8243
8244 @cindex aligned common symbols
8245 @item aligned common symbols
8246 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8247 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8248 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8249 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8250 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8251 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8252 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8253 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8254
8255 @end table
8256
8257 @ifclear GENERIC
8258 @lowersections
8259 @end ifclear
8260 @end ifset
8261
8262 @ifset XTENSA
8263 @ifclear GENERIC
8264 @raisesections
8265 @end ifclear
8266
8267 @node Xtensa
8268 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8269
8270 @cindex Xtensa processors
8271 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8272 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8273 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8274 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8275 example, with the command:
8276
8277 @smallexample
8278 SECTIONS
8279 @{
8280 .text : @{
8281 *(.literal .text)
8282 @}
8283 @}
8284 @end smallexample
8285
8286 @noindent
8287 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8288 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8289 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8290 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8291 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8292 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8293 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8294
8295 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8296 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8297 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8298 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8299 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8300 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8301 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8302 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8303 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8304 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8305 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8306 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8307
8308 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8309 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8310 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8311 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8312 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8313 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8314 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8315 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8316 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8317 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8318 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8319 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8320 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8321 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8322
8323 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8324 control the linker:
8325
8326 @cindex Xtensa options
8327 @table @option
8328 @item --size-opt
8329 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8330 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8331 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8332 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8333 preserve the correctness of the code.
8334 @end table
8335
8336 @ifclear GENERIC
8337 @lowersections
8338 @end ifclear
8339 @end ifset
8340
8341 @ifclear SingleFormat
8342 @node BFD
8343 @chapter BFD
8344
8345 @cindex back end
8346 @cindex object file management
8347 @cindex object formats available
8348 @kindex objdump -i
8349 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8350 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8351 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8352 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8353 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8354 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8355 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8356 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8357 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8358
8359 @cindex BFD requirements
8360 @cindex requirements for BFD
8361 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8362 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8363 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8364 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8365 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8366 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8367 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8368
8369 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8370 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8371 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8372 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8373
8374 @menu
8375 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8376 @end menu
8377
8378 @node BFD outline
8379 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8380 @cindex opening object files
8381 @include bfdsumm.texi
8382 @end ifclear
8383
8384 @node Reporting Bugs
8385 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8386 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8387 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8388
8389 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8390
8391 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8392 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8393 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8394 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8395 @command{ld}.
8396
8397 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8398 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8399
8400 @menu
8401 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8402 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8403 @end menu
8404
8405 @node Bug Criteria
8406 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8407 @cindex bug criteria
8408
8409 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8410
8411 @itemize @bullet
8412 @cindex fatal signal
8413 @cindex linker crash
8414 @cindex crash of linker
8415 @item
8416 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8417 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8418
8419 @cindex error on valid input
8420 @item
8421 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8422
8423 @cindex invalid input
8424 @item
8425 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8426 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8427 object files are correct.
8428
8429 @item
8430 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8431 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8432 @end itemize
8433
8434 @node Bug Reporting
8435 @section How to Report Bugs
8436 @cindex bug reports
8437 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8438
8439 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8440 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8441 recommend you contact that organization first.
8442
8443 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8444 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8445 distribution.
8446
8447 @ifset BUGURL
8448 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8449 @value{BUGURL}.
8450 @end ifset
8451
8452 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8453 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8454 fact or leave it out, state it!
8455
8456 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8457 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8458 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8459 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8460 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8461 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8462 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8463 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8464 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8465 and the most helpful.
8466
8467 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8468 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8469 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8470
8471 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8472 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8473 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8474 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8475
8476 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8477
8478 @itemize @bullet
8479 @item
8480 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8481 the @samp{--version} argument.
8482
8483 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8484 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8485
8486 @item
8487 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8488 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8489
8490 @item
8491 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8492 version number.
8493
8494 @item
8495 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8496 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8497
8498 @item
8499 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8500 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8501 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8502 sufficient.
8503
8504 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8505 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8506
8507 @item
8508 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8509 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8510 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8511 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8512 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8513 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8514 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8515 attachments are best.
8516
8517 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8518 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8519 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8520 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8521 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8522
8523 @item
8524 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8525 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8526
8527 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8528 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8529 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8530 a chance to make a mistake.
8531
8532 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8533 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8534 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8535 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8536 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8537 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8538 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8539 any conclusion from our observations.
8540
8541 @item
8542 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8543 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8544 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8545 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8546 context, not by line number.
8547
8548 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8549 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8550 @end itemize
8551
8552 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8553
8554 @itemize @bullet
8555 @item
8556 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8557
8558 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8559 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8560 changes will not affect it.
8561
8562 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8563 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8564 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8565 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8566
8567 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8568 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8569 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8570 less time, and so on.
8571
8572 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8573 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8574
8575 @item
8576 A patch for the bug.
8577
8578 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8579 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8580 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8581 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8582
8583 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8584 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8585 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8586 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8587 fixed.
8588
8589 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8590 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8591 help us to understand.
8592
8593 @item
8594 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8595
8596 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8597 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8598 @end itemize
8599
8600 @node MRI
8601 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8602 @cindex MRI compatibility
8603 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8604 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8605 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8606 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8607 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8608 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8609 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8610
8611 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8612 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8613 features to make use of them.
8614
8615 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8616 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8617
8618 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8619 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8620 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8621 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8622 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8623
8624 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8625
8626 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8627 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8628 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8629
8630 @table @code
8631 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8632 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8633 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8634 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8635 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8636 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8637 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8638 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8639 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8640 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8641 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8642
8643 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8644 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8645 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8646 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8647
8648 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8649
8650 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8651 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8652 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8653 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8654
8655 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8656 @item BASE @var{expression}
8657 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8658 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8659
8660 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8661 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8662 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8663 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8664
8665 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8666 @item END
8667 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8668
8669 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8670 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8671 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8672 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8673
8674 @enumerate
8675 @item
8676 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8677
8678 @item
8679 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8680
8681 @item
8682 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8683 @samp{COFF}
8684 @end enumerate
8685
8686 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8687 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8688 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8689 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8690
8691 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8692 same line, with no change in its effect.
8693
8694 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8695 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8696 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8697 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8698 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8699 command line.
8700
8701 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8702 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8703 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8704 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8705 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8706
8707 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8708 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8709 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8710 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8711 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8712 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8713 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8714 file, in the order specified.
8715
8716 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8717 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8718 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8719 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8720 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8721 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8722
8723 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8724 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8725 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8726 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8727 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8728 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8729 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8730 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8731 @end table
8732
8733 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8734 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8735 @include fdl.texi
8736
8737 @node LD Index
8738 @unnumbered LD Index
8739
8740 @printindex cp
8741
8742 @tex
8743 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8744 % meantime:
8745 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8746 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8747 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8748 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8749 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8750 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8751 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8752 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8753 \page\colophon
8754 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8755 @end tex
8756
8757 @bye
This page took 0.268673 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.